Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 570

HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst

Imaging Services Service Manual for Download

Purpose of this Document


This document describes how to
add the order list for documentation.
print.
add comments.

Document History

Edition. Release Changes


Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2 06-2008 Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a
printed manual. See section 1.

Edition 1, Revision 2
06-2008 printed in Germany
Document Node ID: 16099429
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
ReadMeFirst

1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation

IMPORTANT:
The order list for documentation is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the order list for documentation:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.

(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select Order list and Front page PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation.
(3) Download the order list for documentation to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.

2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual

IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.

Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if


available.
Some pages especially circuit diagrams for equipment have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5


06-2008 Agfa Company Confidential
ReadMeFirst

2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters

To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:


(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2) Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.

Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar

(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.


(4) Select "Print".
(5) Select the page range.
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select OK.

Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 3 of 5


06-2008 Agfa Company Confidential
ReadMeFirst

NOTE:
Shrink to printable area may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
reduce to printer margins or shrink oversized pages to paper size.

2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual

To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:


(1) Select "Print".
(2) Select All.
(3) Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"
(see NOTE above).
(4) Select OK.

Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual

3 Adding Comments
If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.

Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 4 of 5


06-2008 Agfa Company Confidential
ReadMeFirst

3.1 Exporting your Comments

NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.

(1) In the drop down menu Comment & Markup select "Show comments List".

Figure 5: Drop down menu Comment & Markup

(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3) Select Options - Export Selected Comments.
(4) Save the file with any name.

3.2 Importing Comments

(1) In the drop down menu Comment & Markup select "Show comments List".
(2) Select Options - Import Comments.
(3) Browse for the comments file and press select.

NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 5 of 5


06-2008 Agfa Company Confidential
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Service Manual
Document No: DD+DIS001.10E

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200

DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000

2nd Edition *

* For the revision status per chapter please refer to the latest version of the order list, checklist for completeness in the GSO Library.

CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:
The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0
04-2010 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 29335184
eq_00_about manual_e_template_v07
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
1
DD+DIS001.10E About this Manual

Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 0 / 2


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E About this Manual

Purpose of this Document

This document provides information on the structure and contents of the Service
Manual for the DX-G (Type 5170 / 100) and DX-M (Type 5170 / 200) digitizers as of
software version NIM_2000.

Document History

Edition. Release Changes


Revision Date
2.0* 04-2010 Initial version for DX-M and DX-G with Software Version
NIM_2000 and higher
*Based on DX-G Service Manual Edition 1

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 0 / 3


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E About this Manual

Chapter Overview

Chapter
0 Order List

0 Generic Safety Directions

1 Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures

2 Functional Description

3 Repair and Service

3.1 Machine specific Safety and Repair Information

3.2 Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment


3.3 Troubleshooting
3.4 Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
3.5 Replacement of Parts
3.6 Adjustments and Calibrations
3.7 Software Menus and Setting
3.8 Software Releases, Patches

4 Reference and Circuit Diagrams

5 Spare Parts List

6 Accessories

7 Field Modifications

8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications

9 Maintenance

10 Service Bulletins

11 Installation Planning 1 2 3

12 Glossary

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 0 / 4


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E About this Manual

Explanation of Notes

Safety relevant Notes


Icon Signal Word Situation
CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the
equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any
other equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can
be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user,
engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the
consequence.

Not-safety relevant Notes


Icon Name Type of Information
INSTRUCTION: Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally
the described actions.

IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out


to prevent malfunction.

NOTE: Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action


without having a direct influence on the step or action.
Highlights unusual points.
Indicates background information.
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.

Conventions

Highlighting of Tasks
Task number Task Description Remark
(1) Connect the cable. Examples for working steps to be performed in
(2) Switch the machine on. the listed sequence.

Highlighting of Buttons, Functions and Names within a Task


(1) Press <F9> or double-click the Examples are: Menu topics, keyboard keys,
<Refresh> button. icons, device buttons, commands etc.
(2) Enter file name. In this example a file name has to be entered
as term.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 0 / 5


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E About this Manual

1 About this Manual

This manual is the Technical Documentation for the digitizer type 5170, subtype 100
and 200, with device software version NIM_2000 and higher.

Name of the digitizer: DX-G (Type 5170 / 100), DX-M (Type 5170 / 200)

The DX-G / DX-M digitizer is part of a CR system, comprising:


Digitizer: A digitizer for scanning image plates retaining latent X-ray images. The
digitizer accepts a maximum of 5 cassettes at a time, to be scanned sequentially.
Cassettes with image plates:
o CR HD5.0 (NIP) also named "Detector":
The image plate is of type "Needle Image Plate"
o CR MD4.0R (PIP): The image plate is of type "Powder Image Plate"
o CR HM5.0 (Mammo-NIP only for use in DX-M)
o CR MM3.0R (Mammo-PIP only for use in DX-M)
The NX Workstation: One or more CR workstations with ID Tablet for cassette
identification, image processing and image transmission of digitized images
received from the digitizer.
ID Tablet (from SN 15539 on): Exposed cassette has to be identified in ID-tablet
prior to entering into the digitizer.

NOTE:
This manual treats the digitizer with cassettes and image plates (detectors).
For more information to the other components refer to:
NX Workstation: MEDNET, GSO Library
ID Tablet: MEDNET, GSO Library

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 0 / 6


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Generic Safety Directions
Document No: DD+DIS238.06E

Generic Safety Directions


for HealthCare Imaging Products

Purpose of this Document

This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant information including
relevant environmental and occupational safety instructions for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each Service Documentation as well as
Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via MedNet, GSO Library path:
General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual

Document History

Edition. Release Changes


Revision Date compared to previous Revision 1.2:
1.3 07-2009 Updated table with laser classification to latest changes of the
corresponding standard. See section 3.3.
Added section Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions.
See section 9.
Added safety note concerning inroom installations of CR equipment
and corresponding X-ray shielding. See section 17.
Added laser safety note and safety note concerning electrical checks
after repairs. See section 19.
Added treatment for Lithium batteries in sections 19 and 21.
Updated information concerning the recycling pass. See section 24.

Referenced Documents

Document Title
Not applicable Not applicable

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3
07-2009 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 11849633
eq_generic_safety_directions_e_template_v01
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2009 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Copyright 2009 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 2 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

LIST OF CONTENTS

1 DISCLAIMER......................................................................................................... 5

2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6

3 LABELS ................................................................................................................. 7

3.1 CE Mark................................................................................................... 7
3.2 System Labels ......................................................................................... 7
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation ............................................ 8
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS .................................................................................. 10

5 REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 10

6 INTENDED USE.................................................................................................. 11

7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11

8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11

9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12

10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13

11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14

12 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................... 14

13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17

14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18

15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18

16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19

17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20

18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22

19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23

20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26


DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:
The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 3 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE


PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................27

22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27

23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27

24 RECYCLING ........................................................................................................27

25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28

26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 4 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

1 Disclaimer

The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified


personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.

Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.

No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.

Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with


respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.

Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.

Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you dont
operate the product correctly or if you dont have it serviced correctly.

Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.

NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 5 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

2 Used Icons

Icon Name and Circumstances


CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
can be the consequence.

INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action.
Highlights unusual points.
Indicates background information.
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 6 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

3 Labels

3.1 CE Mark

CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.

3.2 System Labels

All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.

Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation

Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries


C&W_005.cdr

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 7 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation

According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4, based on standard
DIN EN 60825-1:2007.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.

Class # Meaning Example Label

Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even


when using optical instruments. Can
nevertheless produce irritating effects, CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
especially with low ambient light
conditions.

Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no


optical instruments (magnifying glass or LASER RADIATION
binocular) are used. DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
Can nevertheless produce irritating OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

conditions.

Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for


intentional staring into the beam.
Not dangerous for short term exposure
< 0,25 seconds.
Using optical instruments does not
increase the risk of eye injury. LASER RADIATION
Can even for short term exposure < 0,25
seconds produce dazzling and irritating DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM

effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT


conditions.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 8 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

Class # Meaning Example Label

Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when


staring into the beam or when using
optical instruments (magnifying glass or
telescope). No hazard for short term
exposure < 0,25 seconds (aversion
response of the eye) without use of LASER RADIATION
optical instruments. Can produce DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
dazzling and irritating effects even for OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
short term exposure < 0,25 seconds, CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
especially at low ambient light conditions.

Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for


direct view into the beam.
Risks of an eye injury is increasing with
duration of exposure.
Can produce dazzling and irritating
effects, especially with low ambient light LASER RADIATION
conditions.
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE

CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT

Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye


for direct view into the beam.
Viewing diffuse reflections is normally not
dangerous.
Risk of small skin injuries or ignition of
explosive material if the power of the LASER RADIATION
laser beam is close to the upper limits of
class 3 B. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM

CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT

Class 4: Dangerous to the human eye for direct


view into the beam or viewing diffuse
reflections.
Very often class 4 lasers also implicate a
fire hazard.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE
TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION
CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 9 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

4 Product Complaints

Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident
Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written
correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com

Agfa Gevaert N.V.


Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 4485

5 References

Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).

Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 10 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

6 Intended Use

This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.

7 Intended User

This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic XRay
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.

8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks

This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
and applicable environmental and occupational safety matters before attempting to work
with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make
sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the
force of law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 11 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

9 Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions

Each Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineer and Clinical Application Specialist:

Must make his or her personal contribution to improve safety and protect the
environment.
When working on a customers site, has a duty to take reasonable care to avoid injury
to himself or herself or to others who may be affected by their acts or omissions.
Is obligated to adhere strictly to regulations and instructions.
Shall familiarise himself or herself with the provisions of the Agfa Healthcare
Health, Safety and Environment Policy and any specific rules or procedures relating to
occupational safety at work and the protection of the environment.
Shall promptly report any near misses, accidents, incidents or dangerous occurrences
to their line manager and co-operate fully in any investigation.
Shall co-operate with company management on matters relating to
health, safety and environment and, where appropriate, discuss with and / or assist
their manager in resolving matters relating to health, safety and environment.
Shall ensure that any company equipment issued to them, or, for which they are
responsible, is correctly used and properly maintained.
Shall wear protective equipment whenever instructed or if it is recommended to do so.
Shall be responsible for good housekeeping in the area in which he or she is working.
Shall report situations, which could put them at risk, on either company or
customers' premises, to their manager or supervisor; and, if warranted, directly and in
confidence, to the Health and Safety Co-ordinator, Global HSE Manager, or ultimately
to the Managing Director.
Shall report any injuries, diseases or dangerous occurrences to his or her line
manager.
Shall report any accidents, incidents or near misses to his or her line manager.
Shall report any situation of which he or she is aware that is potentially dangerous.
Shall comply with any health surveillance procedure instituted for his or her benefit or
for compliance with regulations.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 12 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

10 Connections to other Equipment

Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.

Connections to other equipment:


Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.

INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed
in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized
national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC
60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 13 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

11 Accessories and Spare Parts

Parts and accessories replacement:


WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.

INSTRUCTION:
Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com.

12 Compliance

Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:


Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)

ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The


products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.

ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: Full quality assurance system


ISO 13485

ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION: The clinical evaluation follows a defined and


methodologically sound procedure.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 14 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products

IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for
basic safety and essential performance

ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices Application of risk management to medical devices

IEC 60601-1-2, It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME


SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential
in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the
electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment
of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and
provide its ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.

Additional standards for documentation:

IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation

Harmonization:

Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/

This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.

IECEE CB SCHEME

The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.

Details see www.iecee.org

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 15 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

Radiation of radio frequency:


CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.

Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 16 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

13 Safety Directions for Operation

Accessibility of the mains power switch:


CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.

Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare
service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
Technical Documentation.
All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
Ventilation openings must not be covered.
If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.

Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen which
may cause an explosion.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 17 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:


Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.

14 Radiation Protection

Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the jurisdiction
in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those authorized by
the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all
radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.

Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.

15 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection

Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 18 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

16 General Safety Directions for Service Activities

This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
The safety directions for operation (see section 13) are also valid for all service
activities.
During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232, RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).

When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a
PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.

Static discharge at electrical components:


CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 19 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

17 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities

Protecting CR (Computed Radiography) Equipment against scattered X-Rays:


Warning:
Image plate is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.

The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way,
that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.

Protecting Film-Screen Systems against scattered X-Rays:


Warning:
Film is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.

The film-screen system shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way, that the annual
dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.

Accessibility of the power disconnection device:


Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.

INSTRUCTION:

Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device


when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 20 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.

R = 1.5m

1.5m
1.5m

Patient environment

This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.

Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:


Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.

Fixing equipment at the ceiling:


CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 21 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

18 Safety Directions for Installation Activities

If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare


trained personnel.
If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.

Connection of the device to the power supply:


CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:

INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains:
Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 22 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

Ground potential differences:


CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.

INSTRUCTION:
Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as
the PC.
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments
a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities.
If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a HAZARD for the
OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.

19 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities

This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 23 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.

INSTRUCTION:

Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.


Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
When removing lithium batteries from the equipment take appropriate measures to
avoid short circuit of the battery:
Either use tape to cover the two poles of the battery or put the battery back in its
original packing and secure the packing by tape.

Performing the electrical test according to national regulations:


WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may lead to
electric shocks.
After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains voltage
inform the responsible organization 1 about the necessity of the electrical test
according to national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
connections inside the device are present.

NOTE:
On MedNet, GSO Library path "General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual" a form IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation for CR Digitizers is
available, to be handed out to the responsible organization (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).

1
Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:
The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 24 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

Performing service activities at devices emitting laser radiation:


WARNING:
Laser radiation. Eye injury possible.

INSTRUCTION:

Strictly observe the warning notes in the service manual of devices emitting laser
radiation (See service manual chapter describing Safety Guidelines / General
Repair Instructions) and at the corresponding steps of instructions.
Strictly observe the warning labels at the modules emitting laser light. For the
meaning of the labels refer to section 3.3 in this document.
Do not look into the laser beam.
Do not open modules containing a laser. Only open modules containing a laser if
explicitly instructed to do so.
Do not keep tools in the laser beam unless explicitly instructed to do so.
Make yourself familiar with the path of the laser light and the conditions, when the
laser beam is switched on. Refer to the Functional Description in the
corresponding service manual.
Do not operate modules with laser outside the device.

Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.

Cleaning optical elements:


CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 25 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.

Opening PCs and Workstations:


Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
Unplug before opening.
Observe anti-static safety regulations.

Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.

20 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities

Remote Service Activities:


Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 26 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

21 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,


Accessories and Devices

In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)


must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
Before returning any spare part with a built in lithium battery remove it and dispose the
batteries locally according to local waste regulations.

22 Safety Directions concerning Modifications

Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be


implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).

23 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials

'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The Hazardous Material
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.

24 Recycling

Agfa HealthCare has Recycling Passports available for all equipment. The Recycling
Passport explains whether hazardous materials, special components and batteries are
present, where they are located and how they can be removed at the end of the life cycle.

The Recycling Passports are meant to be used as information for waste treatment
partners and companies that want to recycle end-of-life Agfa equipment.

To get a copy of the required Agfa HealthCare Recycling Passport please contact your
local Sales organization.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 27 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions

25 Waste Disposal

On August 13, 2005, the European Directive on Waste Electrical and


Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC, came into force.

The directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) aims to


prevent the generation of electric and electronic waste and to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery. It therefore requires the collection
of WEEE, recovery and reuse or recycling.
This directive has to be implemented into national law by the individual
European countries by August 13th 2005.

Due to the implementation into national law, specific requirements can be


different within the European Member States.
This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and / or on
its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household
waste.
For more detailed information about take-back and recycling of this product,
please contact your local Agfa service organization. By ensuring this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators
please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.

26 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)

AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customers site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 28 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
Chapter 1
HEALTHCARE Controls, Connections
Imaging Services
and Setup Procedures
Document No: DD+DIS001.10E

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200

DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000

Purpose of this Document

This document describes:


All important service tasks to be carried out prior to putting the device in operation
Location and function of the controls and connectors of the device

Document History

Edition. Release Changes


Revision Date compared to previous Version 2.2
2.3 02-2011 DX-M Mobile added in following sections:
1.4.1 - Mounting the optional Earthquake Kit / Mobile
1.4.3 - Removing Transportation Locks
4 - Completion of Installation
6 - Appendix

Referenced Documents

Document Title
DD+DIS002.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 11 - Installation Planning
DD+DIS043.08E NX Service Documentation,
Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3
02-2011 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 28941244
eq_01_setup_procedure_e_template_v07
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2011 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Copyright 2011 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 2


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

LIST OF CONTENTS

1 INSTALLATION PREPARATION .............................................................................................5


1.1 Checking Installation Site Prerequisites ...................................................................................6

1.2 Unpacking the Digitizer .............................................................................................................6

1.3 Checking the Shipment Completeness.....................................................................................7

1.4 Mechanical Installation..............................................................................................................8

1.4.1 Mounting the optional Earthquake Kit / Mobile .........................................................................9

1.4.2 Lowering the Digitizer in the Middle of the Room ...................................................................10

1.4.3 Removing Transportation Locks .............................................................................................12

2 CONFIGURATION OF STANDALONE INSTALLATION OF DIGITIZER AND NX


WORKSTATION .....................................................................................................................17
2.1 Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings ...........................................................17

2.2 Loading Digitizer Model Files..................................................................................................20

2.2.1 Loading Digitizer Model Files on the NX Workstation ............................................................20

2.3 Testing Standalone Installation...............................................................................................24

3 CONFIGURING THE DIGITIZER AND THE NX WORKSTATION FOR THE HOSPITAL


NETWORK .............................................................................................................................24
3.1 Moving Digitizer to final Position in the Hospital .....................................................................25

3.2 Adapting Digitizer to uneven Floor..........................................................................................26

3.3 Configuring NX Workstation and Digitizer for Hospital Network.............................................28

4 COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION .......................................................................................32


4.1 Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System ............................................................32

4.1.1 Cleaning and Checking of the Image Plate ............................................................................32

4.1.2 Erasing the Cassette...............................................................................................................34

4.1.3 Exposing the Cassette ............................................................................................................35

4.1.4 Scanning the Flatfield Image(s) ..............................................................................................37

4.1.5 Checking the Images at the Lightbox or Viewing Station .......................................................38

4.2 Checking the Hand-Over Test (HOT) File ..............................................................................40

4.3 Performing a Backup ..............................................................................................................40

4.4 Hand-over of the System to the Clinical Application Specialist ..............................................41

4.4.1 Setup of Connectivity to additional System Components.......................................................41

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 3


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

4.4.2 Customizing System Components according to Customer Preferences................................41

4.4.3 Customer Training ..................................................................................................................42

4.4.4 Performing further Activities depending on local Regulations ................................................46

5 INSTALLATION CHECKLIST .................................................................................................47


6 APPENDIX..............................................................................................................................49
6.1 Additional installation steps for mobile use.............................................................................49

6.1.1 Removing Transportation Locks (Mobile Installation).............................................................49

6.1.2 Installing the Digitizer at the mobile site .................................................................................54

6.1.3 Completing the Installation for Mobile Installations.................................................................58

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 4


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

1 Installation Preparation

NOTE:
The Installation Checklist in section 5 of this chapter gives an overview of all steps
and guides through the complete installation process.
Be aware to register the installation times for the different tasks in the service report
according to the task codes in the installation checklist.

The purpose of this section is to list the required tasks before installation and
configuration to guarantee a smooth digitizer installation.

# Task Overview Section


1 Checking installation site prerequisites 1.1
2 Unpacking digitizer 1.2
3 Checking shipment completeness 1.3
4* Mounting the optional earthquake kit 1.4.1
5 Lowering the digitizer 1.4.2
6 Removing transportation locks 1.4.3
* Step can be skipped if earthquake kit is not available.

IMPORTANT:
This document describes the installation and configuration of a standalone system
(Digitizer with NX Workstation and ID Tablet).
To be able to install the complete system it is additionally required to perform
installation and configuration steps of the NX Workstation.
Refer to Chapter 4 of the corresponding NX Workstation version in the
Mednet GSO Library, path: <Computed Radiography =>
CR Workstation Software>
Up to NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200:
The digitizer model files < DX-G.XML> and < DX-M.XML> keep digitizer software
parameters for the NX Workstation. They are not part of the NX Workstation
software and have to be downloaded before starting the installation from the
Mednet GSO Library path:
<Computed Radiography => CR Digitizers => DX-M/DX-G as of
NIM_2000 => Software>
As of NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300:
The digitizer model files are installed ex factory.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 5


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

1.1 Checking Installation Site Prerequisites

ACTION:
Confirm that all prerequisites described in the "Installation planning checklist" are
fulfilled. This checklist is available at the end of Chapter 11, Installation Planning.

1.2 Unpacking the Digitizer

(1) Compare the labels on the boxes with the customer's order list and the
shipping papers.
(2) Check the packing material for visible transport damage such as:
Dented edges
Damage on the box
Torn fixing elements (metal straps)
(3) Check the attached safety indicators on the packing boxes.

White field is OK.


Red field is not OK.

STOSSEMPFINDLICH

Figure 1

IMPORTANT:
If the device was tilted, the circle in the arrow head of the TILTWATCH changes from
white to red.
If the device was subjected to shocks, the square field in the middle of the
SHOCKWATCH changes from white to red.
In both cases, and if damages are visible from the outside:
Inform the carrier. This damage must be noted down in the handover documents.
If device should be replaced, contact your local AGFA representative.
Otherwise start installation. If device doesnt work, contact your local AGFA
representative.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 6


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

CAUTION:
Damage of unpacked digitizer by inappropriate transport.
Reduced Image Quality possible.
Move the unpacked device very carefully. Especially observe door sills.
Move the digitizer only when lifted completely! Never move the lowered digitizer.

(4) Unpack the digitizer.


The unpacking instructions are printed on the digitizer box.

1.3 Checking the Shipment Completeness

(1) Compare the scope of delivery with the packing list.

Example for packing list:

Quantity Description
1 Digitizer
1 Packing list for Accessory
1 CE declaration of conformity
1 Enclosure with information concerning RoHS*
1 Power cable, Europe, 3.00 m
1 Power cable, USA, 3.00 m / 10 feet long
1 Network cable 5 m / 16 feet long
1 1.5 mm CU filter
1 2 mm Al filter (for DX-M only)
1 Installation Procedure
(Chapters 1 and 11 of the Technical Documentation)
1 USB stick with software for the digitizer, limit patterns for
flatfield evaluation and service enclosures
1 Ratchet for lifting and lowering the device including extension and
nut (8mm)
1 Special Allen key for removal of vacuum valve
1 CD with User Manuals in various languages
1 DX-M Mobile only: Tool to lock/unlock IP Carrier
1 DX-M Mobile only: Quick Guide for Mobile Installation
* ROHS = Restriction of certain Hazardous Substances

NOTE:
Number and format of cassettes and/or image plates is depending on the
individual order.
(2) In case the delivery is not complete contact the Regional Support Network (RSN).
External partners: Contact your local Agfa representative.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 7


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

1.4 Mechanical Installation

WARNING:
Damages of the device, functional problems or damage of consumables possible
if transport locks are not removed completely or digitizer not lowered
completely.
Never operate the digitizer when:
Transportation locks are inserted.
Digitizer is not lowered completely.

CAUTION:
Reduced Image Quality possible.
Do not operate the digitizer, if not lowered completely!

The following table lists the main mechanical installation preparation tasks:

# Task Section
1 Mounting the optional earthquake kit / mobile 1.4.1
2 Lowering the digitizer in the middle of the room 1.4.2
3 Removing transportation locks 1.4.3

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 8


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

1.4.1 Mounting the optional Earthquake Kit / Mobile

IMPORTANT:
The mobile installation of the DX-M digitizers requires the installation of the base plate
and the wall fixation. These parts must be mounted before the installation of the
digitizer at the mobile site by the manufacturer of the mammography trailer / bus.
For the mounting of these parts the responsibility lies in the hand of the manufacturer
of the mammography trailer / bus. The field service engineer is only responsible for the
installation of the digitizer itself at the prepared mobile site.

WARNING:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure. Risk of injury or damage.
The Hospital is responsible for:
Choosing fixing material suitable for hospitals requirements.
Drilling the holes in the wall and floor.
Mounting of the earthquake kit at the wall and floor.
The field service engineer is not responsible for the mounting on the wall and floor of
the hospital. The field service engineer should only work on the digitizer itself.

NOTE:
For instructions how to install the Earthquake kit refer to the Enclosure document
delivered with the Earthquake kit.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 9


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

1.4.2 Lowering the Digitizer in the Middle of the Room

CAUTION:
Damage of unpacked digitizer by inappropriate transport.
Reduced Image Quality possible.
Move the unpacked device very carefully. Especially observe door sills.
Move the digitizer only when lifted completely! Never move the lowered digitizer.

NOTE:
For minimum required space for operation and maintenance refer to:
Chapter 11 - Installation Planning

(1) Take the ratchet with extension and nut (8mm) out of the accessory box. The
accessory box is located on the output buffer. Also remove the USB Memory
Stick and the Allen Key.
(2) Insert the ratchet in the digitizer
(see Figure 2).
(3) Turn the axle clockwise, until the
digitizer rests on its floor plate:
The ratchet can be moved easily
now.

IMPORTANT:
Do not turn more as soon
as digitizer rests completely
on the floor in order to avoid
damage to the lift
mechanism.

Figure 2

CAUTION:
Reduced Image Quality possible.
Do not operate the digitizer, if not lowered completely!

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 10


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(4) Open the 2 fast locks


(see Figure 3).
(5) Open the right cover.

Figure 3

(6) Store the ratchet and the Allen key


in the box of the right cover.
NOTE:
There is an additional
compartment in the right
cover for the USB stick.

Figure 4

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 11


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

1.4.3 Removing Transportation Locks

IMPORTANT:
This section describes the removal of the transportation locks for a common
installation. For mobile installations refer to the appendix (6.1.1 - Removing
Transportation Locks (Mobile Installation)).

CAUTION:
Reduced Image Quality possible.
Remove all transportation locks.

REQUIRED TOOLS:
The Standard Tools are defined in chapter 3.2 of the
DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation.

NOTE:
The removal of the transport locks is also described in an instruction attached to the
input buffer. Every transport lock is marked with a label that should be collected for the
completeness check in Figure 13.

IMPORTANT:
Transport locks can be removed only if digitizer is lowered completely. See previous
section.

(1) Turn screws on the left side


counterclockwise and on the right
side clockwise to open the cover.

closed opened

Figure 5

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 12


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(2) Remove front cover (A) by pulling


it to the front followed by lifting it
off the 2 metal lugs (see detail
B
in Figure 6).
(3) Turn 2 screws (B) and (C) of the
A
left cover counterclockwise.
(4) Open the left cover as far as
possible.
C

Figure 6

(5) Check shock watch at the bottom


of the left frame of the device.
IMPORTANT:
85MC/10G
If the shock watch is red, SHOCKWATCH

additionally perform the


following tasks:
Register the damages
to Regional Support
Network (RSN) / For
non AGFA Employees
please contact your
Figure 7
local AGFA representative.
Check the swivel drive
mechanics and the acrylic
light guide with its fixation
for damages or loose parts.

(6) Write date and result of shock watch check with a waterproof pen at the rack.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 13


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(7) Remove four transportation locks


on the right side.

Figure 8

(8) Remove four transportation locks


on the left side.
(9) Store the transportation locks and
screws in the accessory box.

Figure 9

(10) Remove cable tie at swivel drive


with a cutter.
Remov
e

Figure 10

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 14


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(11) Open transportation lock screw for


IP carrier counterclockwise
approximately three turns using the
ratchet (8 mm) with extension.

See IMPORTANT note below.

Figure 11

IMPORTANT:
Do not turn the transportation lock screw for IP carrier more than
3 turns. More turns can lead to damages of the device.

(12) Remove transportation lock at


cassette buffer unit.

Figure 12

(13) Verify that the list of removed


transportation lock comprises:
The mechanical locks
Ten labels Remove (red)
One label Unlock (yellow)

(14) Close all covers. 10 x


1x
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Unlock

Figure 13

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 15


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(15) Connect mains cable.

Power Supply Input


100 - 240 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC

Figure 14

(16) Remove instructions (A, B) from


A
the input buffer and dispose them.
(17) Remove the protection foil (C) B
from the display.
C
(18) Clean the adhesive that may stick
to the input buffer or the display
with a lint free cloth and
CR Screen Cleaner (same as used
for cleaning the image plates).
Figure 15

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 16


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

2 Configuration of Standalone Installation of


Digitizer and NX Workstation

The following table lists the main installation tasks:

# Task Section
1 Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings 2.1
2 Loading Digitizer Model Files 2.2
3 Testing Standalone Installation 2.3

2.1 Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings

IMPORTANT:
Do not yet connect the NX Workstation to the hospital network.
Connecting the digitizer and the NX Workstation into the hospital network is
performed after the configuration of both.
It is required to login to Windows with a Windows administrator account to perform
the following configurations.

(1) On the NX Workstation configure IP


address "192.192.192.193" and
subnet mask 255.255.255.0 (see
control panel / network connections).
For detailed instructions refer to
chapter 4 of the NX Workstation
Service Manual.

Figure 16

NOTE:
The default IP address of the digitizer ex factory is "192.192.192.192".
The IP address of the connected NX Workstation must differ from this
address within the last three digits.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 17


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(2) On the NX Workstation configure


computer name "DefaultNX"
(see control panel / system /
computer name).

Figure 17

(3) Connect network cable between


digitizer and NX Workstation.
Do not yet connect the digitizer to
the hospital network.

Figure 18

(4) Switch on the digitizer.


NOTE:
After switch on a self test is
executed. It takes Status Indicator
approximately 3 minutes
until the status indicator
lamp at the front panel
changes from red to green.
For explanation of the
status indicator colors see
table on the next page.

Figure 19

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 18


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

Description of the status indicator lamp:

Status Indicator Digitizer Status Action


Activating the erasure Enter cassettes into the input buffer
Constant
cycle. for erasing.
Blue
Proceeding the erasure Remove cassettes from Output
Flashing
cycle. buffer.
Stand-by mode Enter cassettes into the input buffer
Constant
(READY) for scanning.
Green Busy with scanning and
Flashing transporting cassette Remove cassettes from output buffer.
and image plate
Check Digitizer touch panel and
workstation display for further
Service mode
information and detailed instructions.
Constant Or:
Or:
Fatal error
Contact an Agfa certified Service
Red Engineer.
Warm up / Self-test Check Digitizer touch panel and
Processing workstation display for further
Flashing information and detailed instructions.
Software down
Error

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 19


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

2.2 Loading Digitizer Model Files

NOTE:
The digitizer model files need to be installed and configured to enable a
NX Workstation to communicate with the digitizer.

Digitizer with NX Workstation

Network

Figure 20: Example system

2.2.1 Loading Digitizer Model Files on the NX Workstation

NOTE:
Up to NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200:
The digitizer model files are available on the GSO Library. See section 1, page 5.

As of NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300:
The digitizer model files are installed ex factory. Skip step (1) and start with step (2).

(1) Copy the digitizer model file <DX-G.xml> or <DX-M.xml> to following path
on the NX Workstation:
<C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Bin\DigitiserModels>
NOTE:
For details to the following steps refer to the latest NX Workstation
service documentation. Refer to Service Manual in Mednet GSO, path:
<Computed Radiography => CR Workstation Software>
(2) Copy the application license file (ALF) to the directory as described in the
NX Workstation manual.
(3) Enable the ALF-file with the License Manager.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 20


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(4) Start NX Activation Utility.


(5) During the "Activation process"
change the Available Dose Types
from LGM to EI.
(6) Select "None" as "Available Twain
Digitizer" and follow the
instructions on the screen.
(7) Start the NX Configuration Tool.

Figure 21

(8) Go to "General Settings" - "Workstation Settings". For details refer to the latest
NX Workstation service documentation. Refer to Service Manual in Mednet
GSO, path: <Computed Radiography => CR Workstation Software>
(9) Check that IP address is the same than configured in section 2.1.
(10) Enter the following AE Titles:
General Settings - ID station name: "DefaultNX"
General Settings - Performed Station AE Title: "NX_DefaultNX"
Fast Preview Settings - AE Title: "FAST_DefaultNX"

Figure 22

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 21


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(11) Go to "Devices" in the NX


Configuration Tool.
(12) Create new Digitizer.
(13) Click the <Upload> button to
initiate upload of the digitizer
model file.

Figure 23

(14) Select <DX-G> or <DX-M> model


file and click <Open> to load the
model into the database.

Figure 24

(15) Click <OK> to confirm the


uploading of the model file.

Figure 25

(16) Select <DX-G> or


<DX-M> from the dropdown menu.
(17) Enter "DefaultDXM" and click on
<OK>.

Figure 26: Example of upload with


DX-M model file version 2.0.3.0

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 22


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(18) Set IP address of the digitizer to "192.192.192.192".


(19) Configure the default router with "192.192.100.1".
(20) Configure Emergency Procedure.
(21) Test the Connection with the button <Test Connection>.

Figure 27

(22) Activate the configuration.


This will restart the NX Software.
NOTE:
If configuration was not successful, check the user interface
configuration e.g. for exposure index settings.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 23


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

2.3 Testing Standalone Installation

(1) Identify an unexposed cassette.


(2) Insert the cassette in the digitizer and let it scan by the digitizer.
(3) Check, if the image reaches the NX Workstation:
If the image reaches the NX Workstation,
the system works and the installation was successful.
If the image did not reach the NX Workstation,
repeat the installation step by step.

3 Configuring the Digitizer and the NX Workstation for the


Hospital Network

The following table lists the main tasks for configuring digitizer and NX Workstation for
the hospital network:

# Task Section
1 Moving Digitizer to final Position in the Hospital 3.1
2 Adapting Digitizer to uneven Floor 3.2
3 Configuring NX Workstation and Digitizer for Hospital 3.3
Network

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 24


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

3.1 Moving Digitizer to final Position in the Hospital

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Remove the mains and network
cable.
(3) Lift up the digitizer approximately
1,5 to 2 cm by turning the axle
counterclockwise.

1,5 - 2 cm
0.59 - 0.78 inch

Figure 28

(4) Move the digitizer to the final position.


IMPORTANT:
Remove all cables below the digitizer before lowering it.

(5) Lower the digitizer by turning the ratchet clockwise, until the digitizer rests on its
floor plate: The ratchet can be moved easily now.
IMPORTANT:
Do not turn the digitizer more than necessary to avoid damages of the
lift mechanism.

(6) Remove the ratchet.


(7) Store ratchet in the right cover.
(8) Close right cover.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 25


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

3.2 Adapting Digitizer to uneven Floor

NOTE:
DX-G from SN* 1001 onwards and DX-M from SN10001 onwards offers the
possibility to adapt the digitizer to uneven floor. This is possible using two adjustment
plates. This adjustment is only required if the digitizer does not stay firm on the floor.
*SN = Serial Number

IMPORTANT:
Before the next steps, make sure, that:
The digitizer is not switched on.
The right cover is closed.
The digitizer is lowered completely.

(1) Check, whether the digitizer stands


firm on the floor:
Keep the digitizer at the output
buffer and slightly shake it (See
Figure 29).
Evaluation:
If the digitizer does not stay
firm, adjust it via adjustment
plates. Continue with step (2).
It the digitizer stays firm, skip
the following steps and
Figure 29
continue with section 3.3.

(2) Remove front cover.


(3) Loosen the two screws from each
adjustment plate.
It is not necessary to remove the
screws.

Figure 30

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 26


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(4) At this side, where the digitizer


stays firm, insert a screwdriver
between frame and adjustment
plate.
(5) Turn the screwdriver slightly to
push the adjustment plate down.
See Figure 31.
(6) Tighten the 2 screws of the
adjustment plate.
Figure 31
(7) Repeat the procedure for the other
side.
(8) Again check, whether the digitizer
stands firm on the floor.
(9) Close front cover.
IMPORTANT:
Be aware that the case is not flexible and can be raised easily.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 27


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

3.3 Configuring NX Workstation and Digitizer for Hospital Network

IMPORTANT:
It is required to login to Windows with a Windows administrator account to perform the
following configurations.

(1) On the NX Workstation configure IP address, subnet mask and computer name
with the provided information of the hospital.
For detailed instructions refer to chapter 4 of the NX Workstation Service Manual.
(2) Start the NX Configuration Tool.
(3) Click on "Devices" and choose the affected digitizer.
(4) Enter hospital specific data like IP address, AE title, default router and subnet
mask.
(5) Insert USB Memory Stick into USB Port of the NX Workstation.
(6) Click on <Create CPF> and save the file on the USB Memory Stick root folder.

Figure 32

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 28


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(7) Release the USB Memory Stick from the NX Workstation.


(8) Open front cover of the digitizer.
(9) Insert the USB Memory Stick (scope of delivery) in the digitizer.
For more information refer to chapter 3.2.
NOTE:
The USB port of the digitizer does not accept all types of USB sticks.

USB Port

Figure 33

(10) Close front cover.


(11) Switch on digitizer and wait until the status indicator lamp is green.
(12) Start the service menu in the local display of the digitizer.
For more information concerning the service software and how to access the
service menu refer to DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation Chapter 3.7,
"Software menus and settings".
(13) Select <Configuration - Digitizer Settings>.
Settings of the digitizer will be shown.

Service Menu Service Menu > Configuration > Digitizer Settings

Device Info Site Specific Data Date: DD.MM.YYYY 01.01.2010

Reporting Digitizer Settings Time: hh.mm 12.00

Modification Exchanged Components User Interface Language: EN

Analysis & Repair Switch on&off HV on PMM Installation site located higher than 2000 m / 6562 ft. No

Preventive Maintenance Device Specific Data Number of Logfiles 10

Configuration Protection Mechanism Mammography Image Plate Types NIP

Backup / Restore Network Settings see next page. NEXT

Figure 34 Figure 35: Example Screenshot

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 29


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(14) Click on <Next> to go to the next screen.


(15) Select <Load Data from USB Stick> to load digitizer settings from storage
medium. The uploading process may take a minute and no progress bar will be
shown.

Service Menu > Configuration > Digitizer Settings

Configure Network Data:

Select Load Data from USB Stick to load ADC.CPF from USB Stick

OR
Click on next button to configure digitizer and destination setting
manually.

Load Data from USB Stick

Figure 36

(16) Choose digitizer destination from menu and click on <OK>.


NOTE:
The option "View Network Settings" will show the active ("old") network
settings. The new configured IP will be active after restart of the device.

Service Menu > Configuration > Digitizer Settings

Select Digitizer DEFAULTDXM 192.168.4.178

View Network Settings

Figure 37: Example Screenshot

(17) Wait until the service menu is shown in the local display.
This may take some moments and it is possible that the digitizer does not show
any reaction.
(18) When finished, remove the USB Memory Stick from the digitizer.
(19) Mount front cover.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 30


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(20) Switch off digitizer.


(21) Connect the NX Workstation to the hospital network.
(22) Connect the digitizer to the hospital network.
(23) Switch on digitizer.
(24) Test the Connection with the button <Test Connection> on the NX
Workstation in the NX Configuration Tool.
(25) Activate the configuration. This also starts the NX Workstation.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 31


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

4 Completion of Installation

IMPORTANT:
For mobile installations refer to the appendix (6.1.3 - Completing the Installation for
Mobile Installations) for additional steps.

The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required to prepare the
digitizer for hand-over to the clinical application specialist.
# Task Section
1 Checking technical image quality of the digitizer 4.1
2 Saving hand-over test file 4.2
3 Performing Backup 4.3
4 Handing-over the system to the Clinical Application 4.4
Specialist

4.1 Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System

4.1.1 Cleaning and Checking of the Image Plate

(1) Open the detector with the dedicated key


or a pen.

Figure 38

(2) Fix the shutter 1 with both thumbs and let


the image plate slide out carefully onto a 1

table 2 . 2

Figure 39

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 32


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(3) Put the image plate onto the detector.


The image plate has little hooks (see
Figure 40) to fix the Image Plate.
Put the Image Plate on the detector so
that the hooks are hanging over the
border of the detector. With this procedure
a bending of the Image Plate is avoided.

Figure 40

(4) Check the image plate for scratches and pollution:


If scratches are visible, take another detector.
Inform the customer about the detection of scratches.

(5) Clean the image plate according to image plate type:


o For GenRad NIP, GenRad PIP and Mammo NIP clean the image plate
(white phosphor side) by wiping gently with CR Screen Cleaner (order
number* 10+9 9999 1197 0 or ABC-Code: EQP6D) over the whole surface
using a lintfree cloth.
o For Mammo PIP use the prosat wipes (order number* 10+9 9999 1219 0).
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

1
White phosphor side

2
Black tube side
of the cassette

Figure 41

IMPORTANT:
Do not put the CR Screen
Cleaner directly on the image
plate.
Always put the CR Screen
Cleaner on the lintfree cloth.

Figure 42

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 33


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(6) Wait approximately 5 minutes until the surface is dry.


(7) Verify that the white phosphor side is oriented to the black tube side of the
detector.
(8) Put the image plate back into the detector so that the shutter does not scratch
over the image plate.
(9) Insert the key (or pen) into the detector.
(10) Close the shutter.
(11) Remove the key.

4.1.2 Erasing the Cassette

(1) Press the Erase button on the touch panel


at the front side of the digitizer.
The digitizer switches to erase mode.
The status indicator lamp on the left side
of the device is continuously lighting up
in blue.

Erase Button
Erase

Figure 43: Digitizer touch panel

(2) Put the detector in the detector buffer of


Tube side of
the digitizer. the cassette
(3) As a result, the digitizer starts erasing
the image plate and the status indicator Shutter opening and
is blinking blue. locking mechanism

(4) After erasing, the detector is moved to


the detector output buffer.
(5) The digitizer is remaining in Erase mode
for 10 seconds staying constantly blue.
This allows processing more detectors
Figure 44
in a row.
(6) The digitizer automatically switches to
constant green if no additional detector is
entered meanwhile.
(7) Remove the detector with the erased image plate from the
detector output buffer.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 34


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

4.1.3 Exposing the Cassette

(1) Mount the filter at the modality:


For GenRad and Mixed Use mount the Cu Filter at the GenRad modality.
For Mammography Use mount the Al Filter at the Mammography modality.
IMPORTANT:
Use the Cu Filter only at the GenRad modality and use the Al Filter
only at the Mammography modality. Never use it vice versa!
(2) Expose the prepared detector(s) according to table on the next page.
NOTE:
There is an over- and underexposure tolerance.
The digitizer automatically checks for under- or overexposure and
prompts an error respectively:
If no error was shown, the exposure is in a valid dose range.
If an error was shown, refer to the appendix of this document.

IMPORTANT:
For exposure place the long side of the detector parallel to the
anode axis.

Anode
axis

OK Not OK
Figure 45

Exposed area
NOTE:
The entire image plate
must be fully exposed! Image Plate Image Plate

The collimated field must


be larger than the image
plate!
OK Not OK
Figure 46

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 35


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

X-Ray Source Exposure conditions per detector


GenRad It is recommended to expose the detector two times with 10 Gy
X-Ray Source to achieve a good evenness.
(1) Expose the detector with following typically values:
12 mAs
75 kVp
1,3 m distance
Large focus
1,5 mm copper filter (Cu)

(2) Turn the detector 180 and expose it again.

Mammography Only 1 exposure necessary. The detector should not be rotated.


X-Ray Source
(1) Remove the compression paddle before the exposure.
(2) Tape the Al Filter at the tube exit.
NOTE:
The adhesive tape must not be in the X Ray beam.

(3) Expose the detector with the typically values:


200 mAs
28 kV
Molybdenium source / Molybdenium filter (Mo/Mo)
Large focus
2,0 mm aluminium filter

NOTE:
If the image is overexposed select next possible
lower mAs setting on the Mammography
modality.
If the dose has to be decreased due to
overexposure, the settings must not fall below
50 mAs and 0,5 seconds.
The setting will lead to a detector dose of
approximately 350 Gy or 40 mR.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 36


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

4.1.4 Scanning the Flatfield Image(s)

(1) Expose a flatfield:


For GenRad and Mixed Use:
Expose a flatfield with the largest available PIP or NIP detector (if
available): Use the same exposure parameters like for the exposure of the
shading calibration detector. See section 4.1.3.
For Mammography Use:
Expose a flatfield with 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm detectors.
Use the same exposure parameters like for the exposure of the shading
calibration detector. See section 4.1.3.
(2) At the NX workstation select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(3) Identify the detector.
(4) Insert exposed detector in the digitizer.
(5) Wait till the digitizer has finished scan process.
(6) Print the image(s) or send it to the archive (depending on what is available).
For hardcopy the window level should be approximately 1.2.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 37


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

4.1.5 Checking the Images at the Lightbox or Viewing Station

NOTE:
Checking the images and comparing to the limit patterns may only happen on
lightboxes and viewing stations that comply with the specified installation and
configuration conditions for diagnostic reading. For details please refer to the
respective instructions of the viewing stations / light boxes.

IMPORTANT:
The settings of window and level may not be changed after import of the
limit pattern set.

NOTE:
The slow scan direction is always parallel to the short side of the image plate (except
35 x 35 cm detectors). Due to the hanging protocol the appearance of the saved
flatfield might differ from the physical orientation of the detector as it has entered the
digitizer.

43 cm 30 cm 30 cm 24 cm
15 cm 18 cm
24 cm
Slow scan 35 cm
direction
5170enc01.cdr

Figure 47: Image Plate sizes and Slow scan directions

ACTION:
Check the image quality of the flatfield for the following aberrations:
Stripes in fast scan or slow scan direction
Large area inhomogeneities
Unacceptable number of white dots

Evaluation:
(1) If the scanned flatfield does not show one of the aberrations,
no further action is required.
If the scanned flatfield shows one of the aberrations,
continue with step (2).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 38


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(2) Compare the image with the limit pattern set. For detailed instructions see
enclosure document which is part of the limit pattern set.
The limit pattern set is in scope of the delivery of the digitizer or is available in
Mednet GSO Library. It is also available as spare part:
o Limit Pattern Set for verification of shading calibration GenRad:
Spare part number* CM+9 5170 0860 0
o Limit Pattern Set, for verification of Mixed Use and Mammo Only use:
Spare part number* CM+9 5170 0760 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

Additional evaluation step for Mammography Only use:

Perform the acceptance test protocol (ATP) of the CR Mammography Solution.


Refer to Chapter 3.6 of the CR Mammography Solution Manual.
IMPORTANT:
The ATP has to be done by an Agfa trained CR Mammography Solution
specialist.

NOTE:
See table below for an overview of use cases of modalities, consumables and
verification methods.

General Radiology Mammography


Detectors

GenRad GenRad Mammo Mammo


PIP NIP PIP NIP
35 x 43 35 x 43 24 x 30 18 x 24 24 x 30 18 x 24

General Radiology Cu Cu
X-Ray Modality

- - - -
(GenRad only) 1 1
Mixed use Cu Cu Cu* Cu* Cu* Cu*
(GenRad and Mammo) 1 1 2 2 2 2
Mammography Al Al Al Al
- -
(Mammo only) 2 2 2 2

* = The GenRad shading calibration also covers the calibrations for Mammo PIP and Mammo NIP.
Cu = Use Cu-Filter and GenRad consumables.
Al = Use Al-Filter and Mammography Consumables.
1 = Verification with GenRad Limit Pattern Set for Banding and Calibration
2 = Verification with Mammography Limit Pattern Set for Banding and Calibration
- = Not applicable

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 39


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

4.2 Checking the Hand-Over Test (HOT) File

NOTE:
The HOT (Hand-over-test) file is a log file, which is created new (i.e. is overwritten) with
every scan cycle. It shows the most important steps of the last scan cycle.
Checking the HOT file documents the successful completion of the technical
installation of the digitizer as well as the successful connection to the NX Workstation.

(1) Select <Reporting - HOT Report> in the service menu of the digitizer.
The HOT Report will be displayed.
(2) Check the HOT Report.
If the HOT Report must be saved, refer to DX-G / DX-M Service
Documentation, Chapter 3.7 "Software Settings and Menus".

4.3 Performing a Backup

After this replacement a backup procedure will be executed automatically by the


digitizer. The digitizer will save the backup data internally on the solid state disk.
It is recommended to export this backup data manually to an external storage medium.
For more information refer to:
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.7: Software Menu and Settings

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 40


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

4.4 Hand-over of the System to the Clinical Application Specialist

(1) Inform the clinical application specialist about completion of technical


installation.
(2) Inform the clinical application specialist about any irregularities during the
installation.
(3) Inform the clinical application specialist about the required activities as
described in following table:

# Activity Reference
Section
1 Setup connectivity to additional system components 4.4.1
(RIS, PACS, Hardcopy, etc.).
2 Customize system components according to customer 4.4.2
preferences.
3 Train the customer. 4.4.3
4 Perform further activities depending on local regulations. 4.4.4

4.4.1 Setup of Connectivity to additional System Components

(1) Download the connectivity release documents for additional system components
from the HealthCare Library.
Refer to HealthCare Library path: General Info => Connectivity & Application
NOTE:
To get access to the HealthCare Library or to get a copy of the
required documents contact your local service manager.
External partners: Contact your local Agfa representative.

(2) Setup the connectivity to the additional system components as described in the
connectivity release documents.

4.4.2 Customizing System Components according to Customer Preferences

For instructions how to customize the system components refer to the corresponding
connectivity document and service manual of the system component.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 41


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

4.4.3 Customer Training

(1) Hand-over the user manuals (which are also available on the MedNet HealthCare
Library):

# User Manual Reference to


HealthCare Library
1 DX-G / DX-M User Manual Computed Radiography
=> CR Digitizers =>
2 Getting started with DX-G / DX-M DX-M => User Manual
3 Getting started with the ID Tablet Computed Radiography =>
CR Accessories =>
ADC ID Tablet
4 CR Detectors, Plates and Cassettes Computed Radiography =>
CR Plates

NOTE:
To get access to the HealthCare Library or to get a copy of the
required documents contact your local service manager.
External partners: Contact your local Agfa representative.

(2) Train the customer in following activities:


Operating the digitizer. See section 4.4.3.1.
Operating the ID tablet. See section 4.4.3.2.
Usage of detectors, plates and cassettes. See section 4.4.3.3.
If applicable: DX-M Mobile installation. See section 0.

4.4.3.1 Training for Operating the Digitizer

Following items have to be part of the training for digitizer operation.

Cleaning the exterior of the DX-G / DX-M


Cleaning the touch panel
Cleaning the optical unit with the integrated brush

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 42


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

Replacing the air filter element


The user interface (Status indicator / touch panel / status messages at NX
Workstation)
Switching on/off/reset the digitizer
Power and network connector
Boot-up procedure
Basic workflow
Erasing image plates
Turning the volume of the digitizer signals and beeps on or off
Changing the brightness of the touch panel
Retrieving Information about the digitizer
Moving the digitizer
Troubleshooting and errors during operation

See DX-G / DX-M User Manual and user manual Getting started with DX-G / DX-M
for an explanation of the single items.

For NX Workstation specific training refer to the NX Workstation user documentation.

4.4.3.2 Training for Operating the ID Tablet

Following items have to be part of the training for ID tablet operation.

Switching on/off the ID tablet


Identifying cassettes of different formats with the ID tablet
Steps at the NX Workstation for identifying a cassette

See user manual Getting started with the ID Tablet for an explanation of the single
items.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 43


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

4.4.3.3 Training for Usage of Detectors, Plates and Cassettes

Following items have to be part of the training for usage of detectors, plates and
cassettes:

Difference NIP/PIP plates and cassettes


Labels and functional elements of the cassettes
How to detect Full Leg / Full Spine Cassettes (if available on site)
First use and normal operation
Storage and transport
Operating conditions
Cleaning

See user manual CR Detectors, Plates and Cassettes for an explanation of the single
items.

4.4.3.4 Training for Mobile Installations

IMPORTANT:
Always cover the input buffer before moving the bus or trailer, so that no dust can
pollute the digitizer.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 44


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

NOTE:
Print the sketch in this page and hand it over to the customer.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 45


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

4.4.4 Performing further Activities depending on local Regulations

Enclosed a list of possible activities depending on local regulations:


This list is just an example.

# Activity Reference
1 Electrical check IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation on the
GSO Library (Extranet Link / Intranet Link)
2 Acceptance Test Example for Germany: DIN6868

Contact your local service manager concerning the activities which are required due to
local regulations.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 46


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

5 Installation Checklist

# Step Reference Okay Task


code*

Installation Prerequisites

1. Check installation site prerequisites. 1.1 PRI**

Optional: Contact operator of mobile site to


2.
check if mobile installation is prepared.
- PRI**

3. Unpack digitizer. 1.2 INS***

4. Check shipment completeness. 1.3 INS

5. Optional: Mount Earthquake Kit. 1.4.1 INS

6. Lower the digitizer in the middle of the room. 1.4.2 INS

7. Remove Transportation Locks. 1.4.3 INS

Configuration of Standalone System

8. Configure NX Workstation with default settings. 2.1 INS

9. Load digitizer model files. 2.2 INS

10. Test standalone installation. 2.3 INS


* Task Code, only applicable for Agfa employees
** PRI = Pre-Installation
*** Ins = Installation task

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 47


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

# Step Reference Okay Task


code*

Preparation for hospital network

11. Lift up the digitizer. 3.1 INS

Move digitizer to final position and lower the


12.
digitizer.
3.1 INS

13. Adapt digitizer to uneven floor. 3.2 INS

3.3 and
Configure NX Workstation and digitizer for
14.
hospital network.
NX service
documentation
ASC

Completion of Installation

15. Check technical image quality of the digitizer. 4.1 INS

16. Check HOT (hand-over test) file. 4.2 INS

17. Perform a backup. 4.3 INS

Hand-over the system to the Clinical


18.
Application Specialist.
4.4 INS

Further activities:
Setup connectivity to additional system
19.
components (RIS, PACS, Hardcopy, etc).
4.4.1 ASC

Customize system components according to


20.
customer preferences.
4.4.2 ASC

21. Train the customer. 4.4.3 ATR***

22. Optional: Train the customer for mobile use. - ATR***

Check for further activities depending on local


23.
regulations.
4.4.4 ABA****

* Task Code, only applicable for Agfa employees


** ASC = Configuration & Customization
*** ATR = Customer training
***** ABA = Acceptance Testing

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 48


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

6 Appendix

6.1 Additional installation steps for mobile use

6.1.1 Removing Transportation Locks (Mobile Installation)

CAUTION:
Reduced Image Quality possible.
Remove all transportation locks as described.

REQUIRED TOOLS:
The Standard Tools are defined in chapter 3.2 of the
DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation.

NOTE:
The removal of the transport locks is also described in an instruction attached to the
input buffer. Every transport lock is marked with a label that should be collected for the
completeness check in Figure 58.

(1) Turn screws on the left side


counterclockwise and on the right
side clockwise to open the cover.

closed opened

Figure 48

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 49


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(2) Check the right cover. The handles


should be closed (see figure).

Figure 49

(3) Remove front cover (A) by pulling


it to the front followed by lifting it
off the 2 metal lugs.
(4) Turn 2 screws (B) and (C) of the
left cover counterclockwise.

Figure 50

(5) Unscrew the 2 handles at the left


cover (see figure).
(6) Open the left cover as far as
possible.

Figure 51

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 50


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(7) Check shock watch at the bottom


of the left frame of the device.
IMPORTANT:
85MC/10G
If the shock watch is red, SHOCKWATCH

additionally perform the


following tasks:
Register the damages
to Regional Support
Network (RSN) / For
non AGFA Employees
please contact your
Figure 52
local AGFA representative.
Check the swivel drive
mechanics and the acrylic
light guide with its fixation
for damages or loose parts.

(8) Write date and result of shock watch check with a waterproof pen at the rack.

(9) Remove two transportation locks


on the right side.

Figure 53

(10) Remove two transportation locks


on the left side.
(11) Store the transportation locks and
screws in the accessory box.

Figure 54

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 51


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(12) Remove cable tie at swivel drive


with a cutter.

Remov
e
Figure 55

(13) Open transportation lock screw for


IP carrier counterclockwise using
the ratchet (8 mm) with extension.

See IMPORTANT note below.

Figure 56

IMPORTANT:
Turn the transportation lock screw for the IP carrier until it stops.
Never turn it further with force.

(14) Remove transportation lock at


cassette buffer unit.

Figure 57

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 52


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(15) Verify that the list of removed


transportation lock comprises:
The mechanical locks
Six labels Remove (red)
One label Unlock (yellow)

(16) Close all covers.

Figure 58

(17) Fasten handles.


(18) Close handles.

(19) Remove instructions (A, B) from


A
the input buffer and dispose them.
(20) Remove the protection foil (C) B
from the display.
C
(21) Clean the adhesive that may stick
to the input buffer or the display
with a lint free cloth and
CR Screen Cleaner (same as used
for cleaning the image plates).
Figure 59

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 53


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

6.1.2 Installing the Digitizer at the mobile site

IMPORTANT:
For installation of the mobile site the digitzer must be:
Switched off.
No cable may be connected.
There should be no cassettes in the buffer.
Rear cover must be accessible.

(1) Remove 2 upper screws from the


rear cover of the digitizer.

Figure 60

(2) Mount spacer in line with the threads.


Take care, that the spacer is adjusted
as shown in the figure (the figure
shows left spacer on the left side).
(3) Fasten screw at the lower hole.
(4) Repeat step (2) and (3) for the
right spacer on the right side.

Figure 61

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 54


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(5) Connect the power cable.


(6) Connect the Ethernet cable.
(7) Move digitizer on base plate.
(8) Open the right cover.
(9) Remove front cover.

Figure 62

WARNING:
Damages of the device, functional problems or damage of consumables possible
if transport locks are not removed completely or digitizer not lowered
completely.
Never operate the digitizer when:
Transportation locks are inserted.
Mobile Transport Locks are inserted.
Digitizer is not lowered completely.

CAUTION:
Reduced Image Quality possible.
Do not operate the digitizer, if not lowered completely!

(10) Lower the digitizer.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 55


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(11) Insert the fastening nut like shown in Figure 63. The notch of the fastening nut
should point inside the device, bottom side.

Figure 63

(12) Put washer on the fastening nut.


(13) Screw the device on the base plate with the short screw.

(14) Mount plastic cap.

Figure 64

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 56


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

(15) Put washer on the upper screw hole


and insert the screw (see Figure 65
for installed retaining bracket, spacer
on the right side).

Figure 65

(16) Fasten the screw.

Figure 66

(17) Repeat step (15) and (16) for the other side.
(18) Remount front cover.
(19) Put the Allen key in the retainer.
(20) Close digitizer.

Figure 67

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 57


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures

6.1.3 Completing the Installation for Mobile Installations

(1) Switch on digitizer.


(2) Wait until the operator screen is displayed (see figure below).

Figure 68

(3) Press to move the IP Carrier to IP Carrier Park Position.


Wait until message is displayed that the digitizer is ready to be switched off.
(4) Switch off digitizer.
(5) Fix the IP Carrier Adapter Plate with transport lock
(no need to take off front cover, see figure below).

Figure 69

(6) Switch digitizer on.


The status indicator lamp will flash red.
Following message will be displayed: Transport locks are attached.
Switch off the digitizer and remove transport locks.
(7) Switch digitizer off.
(8) Unscrew the transport lock at IP Carrier Adapter Plate.
(9) Follow the instructions in section 4.1 to complete the installation.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 3 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 1 / 58


02-2011 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
HEALTHCARE Chapter 2

Imaging Services Functional Description


Document No: DD+DIS001.10E

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200

DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000

Purpose of this Document

This document explains the functional principle including the functions of the individual
assemblies always under normal conditions (nominal functional sequence).
Furthermore it describes the structure and function of specific individual assemblies.

Document History

Edition. Release Version


Revision Date
2.0* 04-2010 Initial version for DX-M and DX-G with Software Version
NIM_2000 and higher
*Based on DX-G Service Manual Edition 1

Referenced Documents

Document Title
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.4 - Codes, Fuses & LEDs
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 4 - References & Circuit Diagrams
DD+DIS004.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 5 - Spare Parts List

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0
04-2010 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 29732105
eq_02_functional_e_template_v07
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 2


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

LIST OF CONTENTS

1 THE DIGITIZER AS A PART OF THE CR SYSTEM................................................................4


2 INTRODUCTION IN DX-G / DX-M COMPONENTS AND WORKFLOWS ...............................5
2.1 Components of the DX-G / DX-M .............................................................................................5

2.2 Workflow of the DX-G / DX-M System......................................................................................6

2.3 Short Explanation of one Scan Cycle in the Digitizer ...............................................................7

2.4 Detailed Explanation of one Scan Cycle in the Digitizer...........................................................8

3 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE.............................................................................................14


3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................14

3.2 Service Software.....................................................................................................................15

4 SCANNING MODULES ..........................................................................................................16


4.1 Description of most important Components for Scanning ......................................................17

4.1.1 Optic Module ...........................................................................................................................17

4.1.2 Calibration Board ....................................................................................................................17

4.2 Functions of Calibration Board and Optic Module ..................................................................17

4.3 Signal Corrections before and during Scan ............................................................................18

4.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................18

4.3.2 Calibration of the PMT - Light Collector System at Production ..............................................19

4.3.3 Signal Corrections before Scan ..............................................................................................20

4.3.4 Signal Corrections during Scan ..............................................................................................20

5 STALL DETECTION ...............................................................................................................21


6 DETECTORS (CASSETTES WITH IMAGE PLATES) IN A NUTSHELL ...............................23
6.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................23

6.2 Cassette/IP Types...................................................................................................................24

6.3 Applications.............................................................................................................................26

6.4 Image Plate Principle ..............................................................................................................26

6.5 Handling Image Plates............................................................................................................27

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 3


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

1 The Digitizer as a Part of the CR System

The DX-G / DX-M digitizer is part of a CR system, comprising:


Digitizer: A digitizer for scanning image plates retaining latent X-ray images. The
digitizer accepts a maximum of 5 cassettes at a time, to be scanned sequentially.
Cassettes with image plates (also named "Detector"):
o CR HD5.0 (NIP):
The image plate is of type "Needle Image Plate"
o CR MD4.0R (PIP): The image plate is of type "Powder Image Plate"
o CR HM5.0 (Mammo-NIP only for use in DX-M)
o CR MM3.0R (Mammo-PIP only for use in DX-M)
The NX Workstation: One or more CR workstations with ID Tablet for cassette
identification, image processing and image transmission of digitized images
received from the digitizer.
ID Tablet (from SN 15539 on): Exposed cassette has to be identified in ID-tablet
prior to entering into the digitizer. This means that patient data will be linked to
the image data.

NX workstation Digitizer

Cassettes with
Image Plates

ID Tablet Hospital Network

Figure 1: Overview of CR System

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 4


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

2 Introduction in DX-G / DX-M Components and Workflows

2.1 Components of the DX-G / DX-M

The digitizer consists of different components. In the following figure these components
are shown in a profile view of the digitizer.

Buffer Unit

Traverse with snaphooks


(IP Feeder)

PMT
Connector
Vacuum Valve
Light collector
IP Carrier Adapter Plate

Laser Beam
Spindle

Optic Module Swivel Unit

Gear Box

Slow Scan Drive


Vacuum Pump

Figure 2

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 5


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

2.2 Workflow of the DX-G / DX-M System

The following graphic and steps describe a standard workflow in a CR System.

22
4
3

Alternative workflow: 2 3 1 4

Figure 3

Step c:
Take the exposure.
Step d:
Go to the processing station. Enter the patient data and select the examination type or
select the patient from the work list.
Step e:
Insert the cassette in the ID tablet and select the "ID" button (ID stands for "identify").
Step f:
Insert the cassette in the input buffer of the digitizer: Scanning starts.
The digitizer sends the image data during scanning (i.e. during the IP* cycle) to the
NX workstation. The digitizer also erases the IP*. After scanning it can be used for the
next exposure.

* IP = Image Plate

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 6


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

2.3 Short Explanation of one Scan Cycle in the Digitizer

The following steps are an overview of the standard scan cycle in the digitizer. For
details of the scan cycle refer to the next section.

(1) The user inserts the cassette with exposed image plate (IP) into the digitizer.
(2) The RF-Tag reader reads the image plate data.
(3) The cassette unit opens the cassette and the traverse with snap hooks puts the
image plate on the IP Carrier adapter plate.
(4) The Vacuum Pump fixes the image plate on the IP Carrier adapter plate.
(5) The slow scan unit transports the image plate via the IP Carrier adapter plate to
the optic module.
(6) The laser beam which is generated in the optic module scans the image plate,
while the slow scan unit drives the image plate.
(7) The blue emitted light is collected by the light collector.
(8) The Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector converts light to current,
which is converted to digital data by the PMI board.
(9) The digital image data are sent via network cable to the NX Workstation.
(10) The image plate is driven back by the IP feeder (Traverse with Snaphooks) to the
erasure unit: Several LED arrays erase the image plate.
(11) The traverse with snap hooks puts the image plate back into the cassette.
(12) The slow scan drive transports the IP Carrier adapter plate to home position.
(13) The cassette unit closes the cassette.
(14) The cassette with image plate is transported from the input buffer to the output
buffer.
(15) The green blinking LED at the front panel changes to constant green, indicating
that the scan cycle is finished.
(16) The user removes the cassette with image plate for the next exposure.

NOTE:
For a detailed description of the functionality of the digitizer refer to next section.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 7


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

2.4 Detailed Explanation of one Scan Cycle in the Digitizer

NOTE:
Detector is used as a term for cassette and image plate (IP) as a unit.

The table on the following pages gives an overview of the IP scan cycle of the digitizer
and which Sensors and actors are involved.

Explanation of the different columns:


Action of the device:
What is the digitizer doing?
E.g. pushing, scanning etc.
Sensor:
Which Sensor triggers the action?
E.g. switches, light barriers etc.
Actor:
Which actor is implemented in the action?
E.g. motors etc.
Control for Actor:
How it is ensured that the actor worked correctly?
E.g. with light barriers, stall detection etc.
Result:
In which state is the device after the actor finished?
E.g. cassette information read out, ready for scanning etc.

REQUIRED TOOLS:
1 identified detector

For more information concerning the sensors and actors refer to:
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.4 - Codes, Fuses & LEDs
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 4 - References & Circuit Diagrams
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 5 - Spare Parts List

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 8


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

(1) Switch the digitizer on.

Action of the Device Sensor Actor Control Result Step


for Actor
The digitizer starts the boot S203: - Device is ready. 1
sequence. main switch
- Idle status
indicator is green
constant.
- Local display
shows main
menu.

(2) Insert an identified and exposed detector into the input buffer.

Action of the Device Sensor Actor Control Result Step


for Actor
The digitizer detects the - B214: Cassette - Cassette 2
presence of the entered Input Buffer presence is
detector with help of the long Receiver recognized.
distance light barrier in the Sensor
input buffer. - Status indicator
- B215: Cassette starts to flash
Input Buffer green (until the
Transmitter end of the
cassette cycle).
The digitizer pushes the M202: Stepper - B206: Cassette Cassette is pushed 3
entered detector to the very motor Cassette Transport towards left-hand
left-hand side of the input Transport Home Position side.
buffer. Sensor
- S209:
Cassette Edge
Sensor
The digitizer fixes the detector M204: Stepper Stall detection - The detector is 4
to the left-hand side of the motor (SM) fixed.
input buffer. Cassette
Fixation - The detected
detector format is
known.
The digitizer reads out the RF- B211: - RF-TAG contents 5
Tag in the detector. TAG Reader are read out.
- Expected detector
format is known.
The digitizer activates the S209: The trigger to start 6
cassette edge sensor based Cassette Edge the detector
on the fixed detector. Sensor opening is set.
The digitizer unlocks the M203: Stepper Stall detection Detector flap is 7
cassette flap to prepare the motor (SM) (for blocking unlocked.
detector flap opening. Locking before end
position)

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 9


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

Action of the Device Sensor Actor Control Result Step


for Actor
The digitizer opens cassette M201: Stepper - B203: Detector flap is 8
flap. motor (SM) Cover Opener opened.
Opener Home Position
Switch
- B201: Opener
Control Sensor
drives the Traverse with M514: Stepper B204: The Snaphooks are 9
Snaphooks into the opened motor (SM) Z - Sensor prepared to engage
cassette. Linear Transport with Image Plate.
The digitizer engages the M510: Stepper Stall detection The Snaphooks are 10
Snaphooks into the Image motor (SM) engaged with
Plate. Snaphooks Image Plate.
The digitizer checks whether - B216: The Snaphook 11
engagement of Snaphooks Snaphook Grip engagement is
with IP was successful. Right checked.
Transmitter
- B217:
Snaphook Grip
Right Receiver
Sensor
- B218:
Snaphook Grip
Left
Transmitter
- B219:
Snaphook Grip
Left Receiver
Sensor
The digitizer releases cassette M203: Stepper Stall detection The Image Plate is 12
slider of the detector to unlock motor (SM) unlocked in the
the Image Plate in the Locking cassette.
cassette.
The digitizer checks whether B210: Locking The cassette slider 13
the slider of the cassette has Cassette movement is
moved to position to unlock Contact Sensor checked to unlock
Image Plate. IP.

The digitizer transports the M514: Stepper B626: Traverse The traverse with 14
traverse with snapped Image motor (SM) On IP-Carrier snapped Image
Plate to the position to be fixed Linear Transport Sensor Plate is prepared to
to the IP Carrier via vacuum. be fixed to IP
Carrier via vacuum.
The digitizer disconnects the M626: Stepper Stall detection Chassis is 15
connector bolts from the buffer motor (SM) disconnected from
unit. Connector buffer unit.
The digitizer builds up vacuum M617: Vacuum U17 vacuum The vacuum exists 16
with the Vacuum Pump. Pump sensor Vacuum and is sufficient to
Pump on B510 suck the Image
IP handling Plate.
board
The digitizer uncouples the M610: Stepper Stall detection The Traverse is 17
traverse from the wagon. motor (SM) uncoupled from
Carrier Drive wagon and coupled
to the Vacuum
Pump.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 10


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

Action of the Device Sensor Actor Control Result Step


for Actor
The digitizer moves the linear M514: Stepper B512: Linear The linear transport 18
transport to home position and motor (SM) Transport Home is in home position.
moves wagon to lower end Linear Transport Position Sensor
position.

The digitizer switches vacuum M624: Stepper Stall detection The valve is set 19
valve depending on format of motor (SM) according to Image
Image Plate. Vacuum Valve Plate format.
The digitizer relieves the M510: Stepper Image Plate is 20
Snaphooks. motor (SM) relieved and
Snaphooks prepared for
suction process.
The digitizer sucks IP to M617: Vacuum U16 vacuum Image Plate is 21
Vacuum Plates via IP Carrier. Pump sensor, Vacuum sucked to Vacuum
Plate on B510 IP Plate.
handling board
The digitizer moves Vacuum M515: Stepper Predefined value The Vacuum Plate 22
Plate with fixed Image Plate motor (SM) Slow in E-Label with calibration
down to position where the Scan board is positioned
laser beam hits the calibration to check laser
board. beam and cal
board sensors
(only during
startup).
The digitizer switches laser Optic module Laser power The laser beam is 23
beam on. sensor within switched on.
optic module
The digitizer reads out cal B610: The status of the 24
board sensors. Calibration cal board sensors
Board is known (only
checked during
startup).
The digitizer moves PMT with M625: Stepper Stall detection The Photomultiplier 25
Lightcollector to approach IP motor (SM) module positioned
surface. Swivel Drive to start scanning.
The digitizer moves IP - Optic module The Scan process 26
Vacuum Plate with fixed Image is performed.
Plate across the deflected - M515: Stepper
laser beam from the optic motor (SM)
module. Slow Scan

The digitizer moves Vacuum M515: Stepper Motor moves a The Scan process I 27
Plate with fixed Image Plate motor (SM) Slow defined number finished.
down to position where scan is Scan of steps.
finished.
The digitizer detaches PMT M625: Stepper Stall detection The PMT with 28
with Lightcollector from motor (SM) Lightcollector is
scanned IP surface. Swivel Drive detached.
The digitizer switches Vacuum M617: Vacuum IP Handling The vacuum is 29
Pump off. Pump Board gone and the
Image Plate is not
fixed to Vacuum
Plate any longer.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 11


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

Action of the Device Sensor Actor Control Result Step


for Actor
The digitizer moves the wagon M514: Stepper - B625: The wagons of the 30
to couple position. motor (SM) Traverse linear transport are
Linear Transport Locked On coupled with
Carriage traverse with
Sensor Snaphooks.
- Stall detection

The digitizer moves IP Carrier M610: Stepper - B612: The IP Carrier 31


away from the traverse into motor (SM) Carrier Drive moved to home
home position. Carrier Drive Home Position position.
Coarse Sensor
- B615: Carrier
Drive Home
Position Fine
Sensor
The digitizer connects the M626: Stepper Stall detection The chassis is 32
connector bolts to the buffer motor (SM) connected to the
unit. Connector buffer unit.
The digitizer moves traverse M514: Stepper - IP Handling The Image Plate is 33
with Image Plate caught by motor (SM) Board at position to start
Snaphooks to begin of erasure Linear Transport erasure.
at erasure unit (BOE). - Motor moves a
defined
number of
steps.
The digitizer moves the M515: Stepper B519: The slowscan is in 34
slowscan to home position. motor (SM) Slow Slow Scan home position.
Scan Reference
Sensor
The digitizer switches the Erasure unit Board in erasure The erasure unit is 35
erasure unit on. switched on.

The digitizer moves traverse M514: Stepper Motor moves a The Image Plate is 36
with IP caught by Snaphooks motor (SM) defined number erased.
to end of erasure (EOE). Linear Transport of steps.
The digitizer moves traverse M514: Stepper B204: The Image Plate is 37
with IP caught by Snaphooks motor (SM) Z - Sensor positioned in the
back into the cassette. Linear Transport cassette, held by
the Snaphooks.
The digitizer pushes slider to M203: Stepper Stall detection The Image Plate is 38
lock the Image Plate in the motor (SM) (for blocking locked by the slider
cassette. Locking before end in cassette.
position)
The digitizer disengages M510: Stepper M510: Stepper The Snaphooks are 39
Snaphooks from Image Plate. motor (SM) motor (SM) disengaged from
Snaphooks Snaphooks the Image Plate.
The digitizer moves the linear M514: Stepper B512: Linear The linear transport 40
transport downwards. motor (SM) Transport Home is in waiting
Linear Transport Position Sensor position.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 12


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

Action of the Device Sensor Actor Control Result Step


for Actor
The digitizer closes the M201: Stepper - B203: Cover The detector flap is 41
detector flap. motor (SM) Opener Home closed.
Opener Position Switch
- B201: Opener
Control Sensor
The digitizer locks the detector M203: Stepper Stall detection The detector flap is 42
flap. motor (SM) locked.
Locking
The digitizer checks whether B210: Locking The cassette slider 43
the slider of the cassette has Cassette movement is
moved to position to lock Contact Sensor checked to lock the
detector flap. detector flap.
The digitizer sets the flag in B211: RF-Tag flag is set 44
the RF-Tag of the detector to TAG Reader to erased.
erased.
The digitizer unfixes the M204: Stepper Stall detection The detector is 45
detector. motor (SM) unfixed.
Cassette
Fixation
The digitizer pushes the M205: Stepper - B208: Cassette Room for arriving 46
cassettes in output buffer to motor (SM) Pusher Home detector in output
give clearance to new detector Pusher Position buffer is created.
to come. Sensor
- Stall detection
- B212: Cassette
Output Buffer
Transmitter
- B213 Cassette
Output Buffer
Receiver
Sensor
The digitizer pushes M202: Stepper - B206: Cassette - The cassette is 47
unclamped detector to the motor (SM) Transport pushed towards
output buffer and recognizes Cassette Home Position the output buffer.
detector in the output buffer. Transport Sensor
- The cassette is
- Stall detection positioned in the
output buffer.
- The pusher is in
home position.
- The status
indicator turns to
constant green.
- Main menu is
shown on the
local display.

(3) Remove the erased detector from output buffer of the digitizer.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 13


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

3 Hardware and Software

3.1 Overview

The Digitizer is controlled by the device software, which can be accessed via local
display on the digitizer or web client. The following figure shows an overview of main
hardware structure of the digitizer.

Erasure User User


LED Solid
Board Interface Interface
Status State
Indicator Disk

IP Handling
Board
NX Application
PMI52 Board Ethernet Software
(Photo Multiplier
Interface) Interface

Cassette DICOM
Handling Board

USB
PMI52
Power
Chip Optics Calibration
PMT Distribution
Reader Board Board Board

Figure 4

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 14


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

3.2 Service Software

The Service Software is installed on the digitizer itself. It can be accessed via Service
Mode button of on the local display on the digitizer. Alternatively it can be accessed via
web interface from a connected PC.
For more information refer to:
DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation Chapter 3.7 - Software Menus and Settings

Service Menu

Device Info

Reporting

Modification

Analysis & Repair

Preventive Maintenance

Configuration

Backup / Restore

Figure 5

NOTE:
The latest version of the digitizer software is available for download under GSO Library
Path: <GSO Library Computed Radiography CR Digitizers DX-M>

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 15


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

4 Scanning Modules

The next figure shows the modules that are relevant for scanning an image.

Laser Diode

BOL* Sensor
6 Facet Polygon
on Optic module

EOL** Sensor
on Optic module

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Geometric Correction 10
Sensors (1 to 18) 11
12
13
14
15
16
17 Calibration Board
18

* BOL = Beginning of Line


** EOL = End of Line

Figure 6

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 16


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

4.1 Description of most important Components for Scanning

4.1.1 Optic Module

The components of the optic module are:

Laser Diode
Power max = 80 mW (45 mW on IP)

Polygon
o 6 facets
o Ball bearings
o Run-up period approximately 5 seconds
o Follow-up period approximately 10 minutes

BOL (Beginning of Line) and EOL (End of Line) Sensor

4.1.2 Calibration Board

The Calibration Board is equipped with 18 pin diodes.

4.2 Functions of Calibration Board and Optic Module

Calibration Board
The Calibration Board calibrates the optical path with respect to geometric distortions.
Therefore the digitizer measures at each boot-up the timings of the laser beam
between pin diode 1 and 2, 2 and 3 and so on.
As a result a kind of "calibration curve" is created for each facets of the polygon. Using
this curves possible geometric distortions are corrected by adapting the pixel
acquisition time.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 17


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

Optic Module / PMI52 Board (Jitter Correction)


The Jitter Correction is used for correcting line-by-line variations of geometric scan
width, which may be caused by variations of rotational frequency of polygon and/or
external vibrations.
Therefore the timings between BOL (Beginning of Line) and EOL (End of Line) signal
during each scan line is used for compress or expand the recorded line to desired line
width.

4.3 Signal Corrections before and during Scan

4.3.1 Introduction

The light collector has a blue LED built in, to compensate PMT sensitivity irregularities
due to the previously collected light.
This blue LED creates reference signals (REF LUM) before and during scan, to correct
the sensitivity of the PMT "on the fly" (High Tension correction).

PMT EEPROM

PMT

Light Collector

Blue LED

Figure 7

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 18


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

4.3.2 Calibration of the PMT - Light Collector System at Production

The following 4 steps are carried out at production:

STEP 1: Adjusting blue LED


The blue LED is adjusted at initialization of the system this way, that a defined
output signal (LPV = Linear Pixel Value) is reached. The voltage at the blue
LED to reach the value is stored in the PMT EEPROM as REF LUM value.
Parameters of REF LUM: Variations of LEDs and LED mounting position

NOTE:
There is always a set of parameters of REF LUM and REF CAL
for the following working points:
PIP/NIP
HR/SR
Genrad / Mammography

STEP 2: Determination of translucence of the system


An IP with 20 G is scanned by the system. The exact dose is measured by
during production and entered in the system. The analogue output signal at
the PMT is measured by the system, put into a relation to the entered dose
and stored in the PMT EEPROM as REF CAL value.
Parameters of REF CAL: Overall translucence of light collector inclusive PMT
sensitivity

STEP 3: Shading calibration for NIP and PIP


An IP with 20 G is scanned. A reference value for each pixel of each line and
each polygon facet is stored in the PMT Flash ROM.
Parameters: Translucence of Lightcollector - PMT system per pixel on the
scan line

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 19


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

STEP 4: Erasure dose calibration


The automatic erasure dose detection is done via a comparison of the high
dose data of the scanned image with a calibration line recorded during
production of the digitizer.
An image is exposed with 20 % below nominal erasure dose (e.g. with
80 mR for the 100 mR threshold). This image plate is scanned in the digitizer
and the high-dose values are recorded. The resulting line is corrected by the
shading line of the digitizer, sampled down and stored on the PMT memory.
For the scan, the appropriate threshold lines (for NIP or PIP) are read from
the PMT memory, overlaid by the shading line and used for the automatic
erasure dose detection.

4.3.3 Signal Corrections before Scan

AUTOZERO correction
With laser and blue LED switched off, the system measures the output of the PMT.
This value is the AUTOZERO value.
Parameters: Noise of the PMT electronics and remaining light
An error message will be displayed if the AUTOZERO value exceeds a certain limit
(e.g. covers are open).

4.3.4 Signal Corrections during Scan

AUTOCAL Correction
During laser blank time, till the next facet scans a line, the blue LED is switched on to
measure the sensitivity of the PMT. By combining the measured values of several lines
the sensitivity is automatically adjusted (HT at PMT).

Shading Correction for NIP and PIP


The digital value of each pixel is corrected with a correction factor determined during
shading calibration.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 20


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

2D Calibration for NIP only


The 2D calibration corrects for inhomogeneities of a given image plate.
The calibration is done at production time of the image plate. The sub sampled data is
stored on the ID tag of the image plate.
After an exposure of a cassette the production client on the PC downsizes the image.
The production client checks the resized image for overexposure, underexposure and
dynamic range.
It normalizes the pixel values of the image to the maximum. The production client
stores the calibration image on disk and on the ID tag of the IP.

5 Stall Detection

With the stall detection the motor home and end position can be detected without using
additional sensors. Therefore an evaluation of the stepper motor control curve on the
motor controller chip is used.

NOTE:
The functional principle of the stall detection is simplified shown in figure 8.
In reality the motor speed can be reduced just before the stall position, or can even be
reduced in several steps before it stops.

Figure 8: Functional principle of stall detection

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 21


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

Functionality of a stall Detection

When the stepper motor is accelerating the stall detection is switched off, as
torque differs too much during acceleration.
When the motor reaches a stable speed, e.g. after 200 steps, the stall detection
is active for a number of steps, e.g. 5000 steps: The motor control curve is
evaluated by the motor controller chip.
When the torque increases and reaches a certain "switch off torque", as the
motor reaches the end position, the motor controller detects the stall position,
drives the motor a certain number of steps (e.g. 50 steps) and stops the motor.
During deceleration time the stall detection is switched off, as torque differs too
much during deceleration.
Rubber pieces in the end position or other softness in the mechanical system
support that the motor can be driven with relatively high speed towards the end
position.
If the torque increases to the "switch-off" torque before the motor is supposed to
reach the stall position, the motor is also stopped. The software however "knows"
that this stop comes too early and issues an error message (e.g. "IP jam").

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 22


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

6 Detectors (Cassettes with Image Plates) in a Nutshell

6.1 Introduction

NOTE:
Detector is used as a term for cassette and image plate (IP) as a unit.

Figure 9

A fleece inside the cassette protects the IP against scratches and a lead foil serves
as back scatter protection.
The cassette can be replaced without initialization.
It has a re-writeable label for grease pen.
Rubber corners protect cassette and image plate.
NOTE:
The cassette and image plate are drop sensitive.
See section 6.5 for more information.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 23


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

6.2 Cassette/IP Types

The following table lists the available sizes and IP Types of the cassettes:

= compatible
= not compatible

CR HD5.0 CR HD5.0 CR HM 5.0 CR MD4.0R CR MD4.0R CR


General FLFS1 MAMMO General FLFS1 MM3.0R
detector detector (Mammo Plate and cassette MAMMO
(NIP4) (NIP4) NIP4) cassette (PIP5) (Mammo
(PIP5) PIP5)
Available 35 x 43 cm 35 x 43 cm 18 x 24 cm 35 x 43 cm 35 x 43 cm 18x24 cm
sizes available as available as
HR2 and SR3 24 x 30 cm HR2 and SR3 24x30 cm

24 x 30 cm 35 x 35** cm
available as
18 x 24 cm HR2 and SR3
15 x 30 cm 24 x 30 cm
18 x 24 cm
15 x 30 cm
For use
in DX-G
For use
in DX-M

1
FLFS = Full Leg Full Spine
2
HR = High Resolution (10 pixel / mm)
3
SR = Standard Resolution (6.66 pixel / mm)
4
NIP = Needle-structured Image Plate
5
PIP = Powder-structured Image Plate

Figure 10: NIP Figure 11: PIP

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 24


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

The following table lists the available sizes and resolutions of the cassettes:

Pixel Matrix Size


Cassette type Format (cm) Resolution Width x Length Width x Length
(pixel/mm) (pixels) (mm)
CR MD4.0R 35 x 43 HR* 4248 x 3480 424.8 x 348.0
10
General plate 35 x 35 HR 3480 x 3480 348.0 x 348.0
and cassette 35 x 43 SR** 2832 x 2320 424.8 x 348.0
(GenRad PIP) 6.66
35 x 35 SR 2320 x 2320 348.0 x 348.0
24 x 30 2928 x 2328 292.8 x 232.8
18 x 24 10 2328 x 1728 232.8 x 172.8
15 x 30 2928 x 1440 292.8 x 144.0
CR MD4.0R
FLFS cassette 35 x 43 6.66 2928 x 2320 439.2 x 348.0
(GenRad PIP)
CR MM3.0R 18 x 24 4644 x 3510 232.2 x 175.5
MAMMO 20
(Mammo PIP) 24 x 30 5844 x 4710 292.2 x 235.5
CR HD5.0 35 x 43 HR 10 4200 x 3408 420.0 x 340.8
General 35 x 43 SR 6.66 2800 x 2272 420.0 x 340.8
detector 24 x 30 2880 x 2256 288.0 x 225.6
(GenRad NIP)
18 x 24 10 2280 x 1656 228.0 x 165.6
15 x 30 2880 x 1344 288.0 x 134.4
CR HD5.0
FLFS detector 35 x 43 10 4368 x 3408 436.8 x 340.8
(GenRad NIP)
CR HM5.0 18 x 24 4644 x 3508 232.2 x 175.4
MAMMO 20
(Mammo NIP) 24 x 30 5844 x 4708 292.2 x 235.4
* HR = High Resolution
** SR = Standard Resolution

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 25


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

6.3 Applications

The table below lists the applications for which the CR detectors, plates and cassettes
are specifically designed.

= compatible
= not compatible

Type General Full Leg Full Mammo-


Radiography Spine graphy
Application Application
CR HD5.0 General detector *
CR HD5.0 FLFS detector
CR MD4.0R General plate and
*
cassette
CR MD4.0 FLFS cassette
CR MM3.0R MAMMO
CR HM5.0 MAMMO
* Using General Radiography cassettes for FLFS can lead to quality loss in the edge areas.

6.4 Image Plate Principle

After having been exposed in the x-ray modality, the Needle-structured Image Plate
(NIP) and the Powder-structured Image Plate (PIP) contain the latent image of the
patient.
The digitizer takes the scan parameters from the RF-ID chip that was identified with the
exam type on the Control PC.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 26


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS001.10E Functional Description

6.5 Handling Image Plates

CAUTION:
If a cassette is dropped, the image plate (IP) may be damaged and cause severe
damage in the digitizer.
Always check the detector (cassette with IP) thoroughly after it has been dropped.

CAUTION:
The image plate (IP) is fragile and cost intensive:
Risk of damage
When replacing or cleaning the IP great care must be taken:
Never put an image plate down on its phosphor-coated side. This site is very
sensitive and can easily be destroyed.
For GenRad NIP, GenRad PIP and Mammo NIP clean the image plate (white
phosphor side) by wiping gently with CR Screen Cleaner (order number* 10+9
9999 1197 0 or ABC-Code: EQP6D) over the whole surface using a lint free
cloth.
For Mammo PIP use the prosat wipes (order number* 10+9 9999 1219 0).
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

1
White phosphor
White phosphor side side

2 Black tube
Black tube side side
of the cassette

Of the cassette

Figure 12

IMPORTANT:
Do not put the CR Screen Cleaner
directly on the image plate.
Always put the CR Screen Cleaner
on the lint-free cloth.

Figure 13

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 2 / 27


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
HEALTHCARE Chapter 2
Imaging Services Software / Hardware Compatibility
Document No: DD+DIS001.10E

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200

DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000

Please note

The chapter Software / Hardware Compatibility has been replaced by following


documents:
Solution Structure Data Document, Document ID* 30781759
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID* 31333326
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link)

* Access the document by entering the document ID in the Agfa HealthCare Library search window,
or follow the direct link.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document is available from the Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2
05-2011 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 29340903
service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v02
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2011 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS001.10E Software / Hardware Compatibility

This page is intentionally left blank to enable print out of even and odd pages on duplex printers.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-M Chapter 2 / Page 2 of 2


05-2011 Type 5170 / 200 Agfa Company Confidential
Chapter 3.1
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

Document No: DD+DIS001.10E

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200

DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000

Purpose of this Document

This document describes all safety information and instructions. The Field Service
Engineer must know this chapter when working with DX-M (Type 5170 / 200) and
DX-G (Type 5170 / 100) with Software Version NIM_2000 and higher.

Document History

Edition. Release Changes


Revision Date
2.0* 01-2010 Initial version for DX-M and DX-G with Software Version
NIM_2000 and higher.
*Based on DX-G Service Manual Edition 1.

Referenced Documents

Document Title
Not applicable Not applicable

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0
01-2010 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 28902409
eq_03-1_safety-repair_e_template_v08
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 2


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

LIST OF CONTENTS

1 INTENDED USE .......................................................................................................................4


1.1 DX-G (General Radiology)........................................................................................................4

1.2 DX-M (General Radiology and Mammography) .......................................................................5

2 LABELS ON THE DIGITIZER...................................................................................................7


2.1 Position and Meaning of the Labels..........................................................................................7

2.1.1 Labels on Front and Top View ..................................................................................................7

2.1.2 Labels on Rear View.................................................................................................................9

3 LABELS INSIDE THE DIGITIZER ..........................................................................................12


3.1 Position and Meaning of the Labels........................................................................................12

3.1.1 Labels on the Frame ...............................................................................................................12

3.1.2 Label on Erasure Unit .............................................................................................................13

3.1.3 Labels on Optic Module ..........................................................................................................14

4 SAFETY NOTES FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................................................................16


4.1 Safety Notes for Installation Planning.....................................................................................16

4.2 Safety Notes for Installation ....................................................................................................17

4.3 Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work..............................................18

4.4 Safety Notes for Optic Module Replacement..........................................................................19

4.5 Safety Notes for Board Replacement .....................................................................................20

4.6 Safety Notes for Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector Replacement ..................20

4.7 Safety Notes for Power Supply Replacement.........................................................................21

4.8 Safety Note for Repairs inside the Digitizer ............................................................................22

4.9 Routine Safety Checks to be carried out after every Repair ..................................................22

4.9.1 Electrical Check after Power Supply Replacements...............................................................23

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 3


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

1 Intended Use

1.1 DX-G (General Radiology)

CR Digitizer
This CR Digitizer will be used in a radiological environment by qualified staff to scan an
X-ray exposed Image Plate for general radiography; it results in a digital image which is
sent to the dedicated workstation. The digitizer is not indicated for use in
mammography application.

CR System
CR System consists of following products:
CR Digitizer
CR Cassettes
CR Image Plates for General Radiography
CR Modality Workstation

This CR System will be used in a radiological environment by qualified staff to read-out,


process and route static X-ray radiographic images for general radiography.
General radiography application includes Full Leg Full Spine, Dental, Extremities,
Pediatrics applications
The system is not indicated for use in mammography application.

CR Cassette
The CR Cassette will be used in a radiological environment by qualified staff to protect
the CR Image Plate for light and damages during X-ray exposure, transport and
handling.

CR Image Plate for General Radiography


The CR Image Plate will be used in a radiological environment by qualified staff to
capture the static X-ray radiographic images for general radiography application; the
Image Plate will be scanned by the CR Digitizer.

NX Workstation
For the intended use of the NX Workstation refer to Chapter 1 "Product Description" of
the latest NX Service documentation available in the MedNet GSO Library under:
<GSO Library - Computed Radiography - CR Workstation Software>

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 4


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

1.2 DX-M (General Radiology and Mammography)

CR Digitizer
This CR Digitizer will be used in a radiological environment by qualified staff to scan an
X-ray exposed Image Plate for general radiography and mammography applications.
It results into a digital image which is sent to the dedicated workstation.

CR System
This CR System will be used in a radiological environment by qualified staff to read-out,
process and route static X-ray radiographic images for general radiography and
mammography application.
General radiography application includes Full Leg Full Spine, Dental,
Extremities, Pediatrics applications.

Mammo application
The CR Mammography Solution can be used for diagnostic mammography and
screening mammography, in compliance to local regulations.

Diagnostic mammography
Diagnostic mammography is a radiographic examination. It is performed to
provide additional information about patients who have signs and/or
symptoms of breast disease or radiographic findings of concern. It can also
be performed in situations where direct supervision of the imaging is
required by the interpreting physician.
A diagnostic mammogram is performed under the direct supervision of a
qualified physician in mammography and may include mediolateral oblique
(MLO), craniocaudal (CC) and/or additional views.
NOTE:
The Solution is non-dedicated because the Digitizer can also be
used to scan General Radiology images (mixed use).
Direct supervision is defined as the physician being present and
immediately available to furnish assistance and direction
throughout the performance of the procedure.

Screening mammography
Screening mammography is a radiological examination to detect
unsuspected breast cancer in asymptomatic women. This examination may
be performed without a physician in attendance.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 5


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

CR Cassette
The CR Cassette will be used in a radiological environment by qualified staff to protect
the CR Image Plate for light and damages during X-ray exposure, transport and
handling.
CR Image Plate for Mammography
The CR Image Plate will be used in a radiological environment by qualified staff to
capture the static X-ray radiographic images for mammography application; the Image
Plate will be scanned by the CR Digitizer.

CR Image Plate for General Radiography


The CR Image Plate will be used in a radiological environment by qualified staff to
capture the static X-ray radiographic images for general radiography application; the
Image Plate will be scanned by the CR Digitizer.

NX Workstation
For the intended use of the NX Workstation refer to Chapter 1 "Product Description" of
the latest NX Service documentation available in the MedNet GSO Library under:
<GSO Library - Computed Radiography - CR Workstation Software>

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 6


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

2 Labels on the Digitizer

2.1 Position and Meaning of the Labels

2.1.1 Labels on Front and Top View

up down

Figure 1

Label Meaning

Do not put your fingers in the input slot of the digitizer; they can
get hurt when caught between the cassette and the fixation.
Insert the cassette as described in the basic workflow of the
digitizer Workflow Sheets.

WARNING:
Risk of hand injuries if cassette edge sensor is activated and
hand or finger is inserted in cassette entry.
Keep fingers / hand away from cassette unit entry when
a cassette is inserted.
Do not activate cassette edge sensor by hand.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 7


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

Label Meaning

Caution shock sensitive detector inside

CAUTION:
If you drop a cassette, the image plate (IP) may be damaged
and cause severe damage in the digitizer.
Always check the detector (cassette with IP) thoroughly after it
has been dropped.

Label Meaning
Lift mechanism:
Showing the direction for lift up and to let down the digitizer.
up down

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 8


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

2.1.2 Labels on Rear View

Contains Transmitter Module


FCC- ID- Nr. OKY1003925351A02C 1
2

3
4
5
6

Figure 2

Label c Meaning

Contains Transmitter Module FCC* label


FCC- ID- Nr. OKY1003925351A02C * Federal Communications Commission

Label d

Meaning
Caution: Remove power plug and FCC* rules.
* Federal Communications Commission

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 9


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

CAUTION:
Damages of the device possible during servicing or transport.
Remove power plug before servicing.
Transport may only be undertaken as described in the
manuals.

Label e Meaning

Laser class 1 label:

With covers closed the digitizer is a


Class 1 laser product and not dangerous to
the human eye or skin.

Label f Meaning

Label indicating laser safety according Code


of Federal Regulations, title 21,
Subchapter J.

Label g Meaning

China RoHS* label EFUP 50

EFUP = Environmental Friendly Use Period


* Restriction of Hazardous Substances

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 10


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

Label h Meaning

Type label located on the rear side shows:


Example: Manufacturer
Type number
Serial number
Input voltage, current and frequency
Production date
Production site
Information about certificates
(CE label etc.)

Label i Meaning

Equipotential label

WARNING:
Risk of electrical shock.
Unplug the power cord before removing the supplementary earth
connector.
When reconnecting the supplementary earth connector or replacing the
power supply check the protective earth resistance according to the
national regulations.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 11


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

3 Labels inside the Digitizer

3.1 Position and Meaning of the Labels

3.1.1 Labels on the Frame

Figure 3

Label c Meaning

Ground Connection

WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device may lead to
electric shocks.
Make sure, that all grounding connections to the digitizer frame
are present.

Label d Meaning
Shock Watch

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 12


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

3.1.2 Label on Erasure Unit

200 c

Figure 4

Label Meaning

c
Warning label: Hot area
200

WARNING:
The erasure unit is hot: Risk of burns.
Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.

CAUTION:
Reflector of the erasure unit: Sensitive surface, reduced
image quality and defect of reflector possible.
Do not touch the reflector of the erasure unit by hand.
Do not use cleaning agents to clean the reflector.
Only use a lint-free cloth for cleaning.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 13


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

3.1.3 Labels on Optic Module

1 1

3 4 5 6

Figure 5

Label c Meaning

Warning label:
No service / maintenance
parts inside DO NOT OPEN!

Label d Meaning
Example:
Type label:
Optics assembly

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 14


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

Label e Meaning

OEM* product label


* OEM = Original Equipment Manufacturer

Label f Meaning

Danger label:
Avoid direct exposure to beam.

Label g Meaning

Caution 3B Laser

WARNING:
80 mW Laser (Class 3B) in the OPTIC MODULE may cause
eye or skin injuries.
Do not keep tools in the Laser beam when the device is switched on or
the interlock switch is overridden with a service key.
Do not open the cover of the OPTIC MODULE.
Avoid direct and indirect eye contact.

Label h Meaning

Bar-Code on Label Exchange Assembly label

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 15


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

4 Safety Notes for Service Activities

4.1 Safety Notes for Installation Planning

WARNING:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.

CAUTION:
Reduced airflow may lead to pollution in the digitizer.
Keep a minimum of 5 cm (2 inches) between left digitizer side and the wall.

Do not store anything:


In front of the left cover at the air outlet
In front of the right cover (underneath the output buffer) at the air inlet

WARNING:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure. Risk of injury or damage.
Hospital is responsible for:
Choosing fixing material suitable for hospitals requirements.
Drilling the holes in the wall and floor.
Mounting of the earthquake kit at the wall and floor.
The field service engineer is not responsible for the mounting on the wall and floor of
the hospital. The field service engineer should only work on the digitizer itself.

WARNING:
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in
different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can
cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.

To comply with IEC 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
Always connect the associated monitor to the same
Uninterruptible Power Supply as the PC.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 16


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

WARNING:
Image plate is sensitive for scattered X-rays. Reduced image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this
way, that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.

WARNING:
Excessive vibrations during scanning may decrease image quality.
Do not apply excessive shock or vibration to the digitizer during operation. This may
decrease the image quality. Neither should the device be moved during operation.

4.2 Safety Notes for Installation

WARNING:
Damages of the device, functional problems or damage of consumables possible
if transport locks are not removed completely or digitizer not lowered
completely.
Never operate the digitizer when:
Transportation locks are inserted.
Digitizer is not lowered completely.

CAUTION:
Damage of unpacked digitizer by inappropriate transport.
Reduced Image Quality possible.
Move the unpacked device very carefully. Especially observe door sills.

CAUTION:
Reduced Image Quality possible.
Do not operate the digitizer, if not lowered completely!

CAUTION:
Reduced Image Quality possible.
Remove all transportation locks.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 17


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

4.3 Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work

WARNING:
During operation the erasure unit is hot: 200 c

Risk of burns.
Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.

CAUTION:
Sensitive surface. Reduced image quality possible due to clouded reflector.
Do not touch the reflector of the erasure unit by hand.
Do not use cleaning agents to clean the reflector.
Only use a lint-free cloth for cleaning.

CAUTION:
Spindle is lubricated with special grease. To prevent loss of lubrication
properties, this grease may not be mixed with other lubrication material.
Do not lubricate the spindle!

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 18


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

4.4 Safety Notes for Optic Module Replacement

CAUTION:
Optic module electronics can be damaged.
Only disconnect the optic module cable when the digitizer is switched off.

CAUTION:
Risk of injury.
Be careful with the Optic Module mounting pins after removal of the Optic Module.

CAUTION:
Optics can be polluted.
Handle the optic module very carefully.
Store it flat on a safe and clean place.
Put it the laser emission opening downward to avoid collecting dust.

Figure 6: Storage OK Figure 7: Storage Not OK

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 19


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

4.5 Safety Notes for Board Replacement

CAUTION:
Electronics can be damaged.
Only disconnect the boards when the digitizer is switched off.
Use wrist strap to prevent from electrostatic discharge.

4.6 Safety Notes for Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT)


with Light Collector Replacement

CAUTION:
The light collector can break when mechanically stressed.
Handle the PMT with light collector with great care.

CAUTION:
Light collector is fragile: Risk of damage.
When mounting the new light collector great care must be taken.
Do not touch the surface of the light collector.

IMPORTANT:
Handle the Photo Multiplier with Light collector very carefully.
Store it on the straight, metal side (see Figure 8).
Store it on a safe and clean place.
Protect PMT from bright light. Cover the light entrance to protect the PMT from
excessive light entering.

Figure 8

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 20


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

4.7 Safety Notes for Power Supply Replacement

DANGER:
If the cables at the input side of the power supply are mounted wrong, the
housing of the digitizer can be connected to high voltage. Danger to life.
Mount the cables at the power supply input as indicated on the cables and shown in
Figure 9 (black, white, green-yellow).

Figure 9

CAUTION:
If the cables at the output side at the top of the power supply are mounted
wrong, all printed circuit boards supplied by the power supply will be defective.
Mount the cables as shown in Figure 10 (black, red) below. The red cable connection
is marked with a red dot. Never connect a different-colored cable to the Vout connection
labeled with the red dot.

Figure 10

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 21


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

4.8 Safety Note for Repairs inside the Digitizer

WARNING:
Risk of electrical shock.
Switch off the digitizer and disconnect it from the mains before performing any service
interventions at the digitizer.

4.9 Routine Safety Checks to be carried out after every Repair

Check the following points after every repair:

Perform visual check for obstacles, protruding parts, defective housings, or sharp
edges in the machine environment.
Check the function of the interlock switch.
Check the condition of hoses, power cables, strain relief, and fuses.
Test the function of the air filter.
Check the grounding connections on metallic panels / housing parts.
Check the condition of power cables and plugs.
Follow the instructions for ESD (electrostatic discharge) safe return of
printed circuit boards for repairs by using the original packing material of the
replacement part.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 22


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

4.9.1 Electrical Check after Power Supply Replacements

WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may
lead to electric shocks.
After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains
voltage inform the operator about the necessity of the electrical check according
to national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist it is recommend to
perform the electrical check according to IEC 62353.
Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
connections inside the device are present.

The electrical check is split up in two steps:


Step Task Reference
1 Perform the basic protective earth test. 4.9.1.1
2 Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations. 4.9.1.2

4.9.1.1 Basic Protective Earth Test

(1) Use a multimeter that is capable to measure a resistance < 1 Ohm.

(2) Measure the resistance of your


multimeter configuration, i.e. select
smallest range of resistance
measurement and measure the
resistance of your probes.

Figure 11

(3) Disconnected the power cable at the wall side and at the device.
(4) Remove rear cover.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 23


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

Basic protective earth test without power cord


(1) Put one probe at the ground connector of the mains input socket.
(2) Put the other probe at the four measured points shown in Figure 12 to test the
resistance. The electrical resistance in this case has to be 0.1 Ohm higher than
the result of your probe test (e.g. the probe test resulted in 0.1 Ohm, the earth
test result may not exceed 0.2 Ohm).

Figure 12: Measuring Points

Basic protective earth test including power cord


(1) Insert the power cord at the digitizer side. Leave it disconnected at the wall side.
(2) Put one probe at the ground connector of the mains connector.
(3) Put the other probe at the four measuring points shown in Figure 12 to test
the resistance. The electrical resistance in this case has to be 0.3 Ohm higher
than the result of your probe test (value for detachable cable).
IMPORTANT:
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement exceeds the limits
(0.1 Ohm without mains cable; 0.3 Ohm with mains cable):
Check the digitizer for loose grounding connections!

4.9.1.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations

ACTION:
Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations.
It is recommend to perform the electrical check according to IEC 62353.
According to National Regulations a partial acceptance is necessary.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.1 / 24


01-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Chapter 3.2
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Tools and auxiliary Means

Document No: DD+DIS001.10E

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200

DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000

Purpose of this Document

This document describes tools and auxiliary means for the DX-G (Type 5170 / 100)
and DX-M (Type 5170 / 200) digitizers as of software version NIM_2000.

Document History

Edition. Release Changes


Revision Date compared to previous Version 2.1
2.2 07-2010 Updated order numbers for
USB Memory Stick and Prosat Wipes
Added Polynit Wipes

Referenced Documents

Document Title
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 1 - Controls, Connections, Setup Procedure
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.6 - Calibrations & Adjustments
DD+DIS043.08E NX Service Documentation,
Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2
07-2010 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 28942101
eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v07
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Tools and auxiliary Means

Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.2 / 2


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Tools and auxiliary Means

LIST OF CONTENTS
1 BASIC SERVICE TOOLS .........................................................................................................4
2 ADDITIONAL SERVICE TOOLS ..............................................................................................5
2.1 Recommended Configuration of the Service PC ......................................................................6

3 SERVICE SOFTWARE (AS OF SOFTWARE VERSION NIM_2000) ......................................6

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.2 / 3


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Tools and auxiliary Means

1 Basic Service Tools

ACTION:
Make sure that the following tools are available.

Set 5,5 mm to 12 mm

Set 1,5 to 10 mm,


preferrably with ball-shaped head

Set 3 mm to 6 mm (magnetic)

Set 5,5 mm to 12 mm

Small and medium size

Small and medium size

Needle nosed pliers

Cutter

Antistatic wrist strap

200

Multimeter (Ohmmeter)

Flash light

Lint free cloth

Figure 1: Basic Service Tools

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.2 / 4


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Tools and auxiliary Means

2 Additional Service Tools

ACTION:
Make sure that the following tools are available.

Tool AGFA Order Number* Purpose


CR Screen Cleaner 10+9 9999 1197 0 Clean GenRad Image Plates.
(2 bottles)
Prosat wipes 10+9 9999 1219 0 Clean Mammo Needle Image
Plates.
Polynit wipes 10+9 9999 1273 0 Clean Mammo Powder Image
Plates.
Service key CM+9 0426 6309 0 Override the interlock.
Loupe 8x CM+9 9579 9904 0 Check image quality of films at the
light box.
Cu Filter CM+9 5155 1015 2 Exposure of test images:
1,5 mm Part of delivery of DX-G and DX-M
2 mm Al Filter CM+9 5148 1090 0 Exposure of test images:
Part of delivery for DX-M only
USB memory stick CM+9 5170 0760 1 Transfer data between the
(checked to be Service PC and digitizer. See also
virus-free) IMPORTANT note next page.
Vacuum cleaner CM+9 9999 0895 0 Clean the inside of the digitizer.
(220/240V, 50-60 Hz)
Dirt bags for vacuum CM+9 9999 0896 0 For usage with vacuum cleaner.
cleaner (10 x)
Vacuum cleaner Commercially available: Clean the inside of the digitizer.
(100/120V, 50-60 Hz) Acquire locally.
Service PC Commercially available: Copy the digitizer software from
Acquire locally. PC to CD ROM or USB Memory
stick.
For requirements of the Service
PC refer to 2.1.
Network cable Commercially available: Transfer data between the digitizer
Acquire locally. and the Service PC in case that
web interface is used.

* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.2 / 5


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Tools and auxiliary Means

IMPORTANT:
For several service activities a USB stick is required. One USB Memory stick is
scope of delivery of the digitizer.
The USB port of the digitizer does not accept all types of USB sticks.
The USB Memory Stick delivered with the digitizer is recommended. The USB Stick
can also be ordered via order number*: CM+9 5170 0760 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

2.1 Recommended Configuration of the Service PC

ACTION:
Make sure, that the Service PC meets the basic requirements listed below.

Hardware Software
Network connection RJ45 Windows XP or Windows Vista
CD ROM drive Browser Internet Explorer 6.0
USB port

3 Service Software (as of Software Version NIM_2000)

The service software controls the digitizer. With the service software it is possible to
perform e.g. maintenance tasks, calibrations or backups.
The service software can be accessed directly via service menu on the local display of
the digitizer. Alternatively it is possible to connect to the service software via web
interface from a Service PC.
For more information refer to:
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.7: Software Menus and Settings

ACTION:
Make sure that the latest service software is installed on the digitizer.
NOTE:
The latest version of the digitizer software is available for download in the
Mednet GSO Library, path:
<GSO Library Computed Radiography CR Digitizers DX-M>

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.2 / 6


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Chapter 3.3
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting

Document No: DD+DIS001.10E

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200

DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000

Please note

For troubleshooting information refer to the separately available


Troubleshooting Guide, DD+DIS061.10E:
MEDNET GSO Library Computed Radiography CR Digitizers DX-M
Troubleshooting Guide *

* For external partners: Please ask your local Agfa representative for access.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0
04-2010 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 29336043
eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v06
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Troubleshooting

This page is intentionally left blank to enable print out of even and odd pages on duplex printers.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.3 / 2


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Chapter 3.4
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

Document No: DD+DIS001.10E

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200

DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000

Purpose of this Document

This document describes the location and meaning of the Codes, Fuses and LEDs on
the different Printed Circuit Boards (PCB) for repair activities.
It describes how to detect defective boards.

IMPORTANT:
Except F8 on IP-Handling board all fuses are not foreseen to be exchanged.
Fuses only prevent damage in case of defects within the digitizer.

Document History

Edition. Release Version


Revision Date
2.0* 04-2010 Initial version for DX-M and DX-G
with Software Version higher than NIM_2000
* Based on DX-G Service Manual Edition 1

Referenced Documents

Document Title
Not applicable

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0
04-2010 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 29333534
eq_03-4_codings_e_template_v07
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 2


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

LIST OF CONTENTS

1 DISPLAY CONTROL BOARD ..................................................................................................4


2 CASSETTE HANDLING BOARD .............................................................................................5
3 PMI52 BOARD (PHOTO MULTIPLIER INTERFACE)..............................................................7
4 PMI52 POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD...............................................................................10
5 IP HANDLING BOARD ...........................................................................................................12
6 ERASURE LED CONTROL BOARD ......................................................................................14
7 STATUS INDICATOR ON THE USER INTERFACE BOARD ................................................15

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 3


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

1 Display Control Board

NOTE:
The following Figure 1 shows the Display Control Board and the position of the
fuse F1 for quick finding.

Figure 1

IMPORTANT:
(1) Check the fuse F1.
(2) Replace the Display Control Board in case the fuse F1 is defective.

Fuse name Fuse value Load circuit


F1 1AT Backlight Driver

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 4


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

2 Cassette Handling Board

NOTE:
The following Figure 2 shows the Cassette Handling Board and the position of the
switches, fuses and LEDs for quick finding.

Figure 2

Switch Meaning
ON = normal operation (= default)
S1 / 1
OFF = debug position. Only for R&D purpose.
S1 / 2 Not used.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 5


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

IMPORTANT:
(1) Check the fuses listed below.
(2) Replace the Cassette Handling Board in case one of the fuses is defective.

Fuse name Fuse value Load circuit


F1#18 2AT +39V booster for Stepper Motor Cassette Transport
F1#3 1AT Power supply layout module 5V Logic Supply
F14 5AT +28V (main input voltage) from power supply
F1#13 1AT 5V supply for Radio Frequency (RF) Tag Reader
F16 250mAT +28V supply for LED status indicator

(3) Check the conditions indicated by the LEDs.

LED Meaning
LD5 Red: ON if power for the board available.
LED blinking: Software is up and running.
LD6
LED steadily on: Software not running

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 6


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

3 PMI52 Board (Photo Multiplier Interface)

NOTE:
The following Figure 3 shows the PMI52 Board and the position of the
switches, fuses and LEDs for quick finding.

Figure 3

Switch Meaning
S1#12 Hardware Reset

S1#2 Software Reset

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 7


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

IMPORTANT:
(1) Check the fuses listed below.
(2) Replace the PMI52 Board in case one of the fuses is defective.

Fuse name Fuse value Load circuit


F1 1AT USB Interface

F1#16 1AT PMT (PhotoMultiplier) Interface

F1#17 1AT 1.2V PWR (Power)

F2#17 5AT 3.3V PWR

F3#17 2AT 24V PWR Polygon

(3) Check the conditions indicated by the LEDs.

LED Meaning
FL nCS on-board FLASH device activity
LD1#2
For R&D purpose only.*
FL nCS off-board FLASH device activity
LD2#2
For R&D purpose only.*
LD3#2 2V5 for MPC5200

LD4#2 1V5 for MPC5200

LD5#2 1V5 for MPC5200 PLL


Ethernet RECEIVE activity
LD1#4
For R&D purpose only *
LD1#5 USB PWR
1.5VD (Voltage Drop, Voltage it takes to make electricity flow through
LD4#12
a LED and thus light it up.)
LD5#12 2.5VD

LD1#16 5.0VD_PMT
Access-CF-Flash Card
LD1#3
For R&D purpose only *
FAIL/JAVA/ SWAP/SLED3
LD16
For R&D purpose only *
* If these LEDs are off, this does not necessarily mean malfunction of the board.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 8


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

LED Meaning
LD15 Timer 1s SLED2 Watchdog, blinking = OK
CF/I2C/ SPI/SLED1
LD14
For R&D purpose only *
USB/CAN/SLED0
LD13
For R&D purpose only *
Red LED, ON after power on.
LD12
OFF as soon as FPGA content is loaded properly
LD1#17 +12V OPT_OK

LD2#17 +12V CAL_OK

LD3#17 +20V/-10V PMT_OK

LD4#17 +8V ANALOG_OK

LD5#17 +12V CAN_PWR_OK

LD6#17 +12V HD_OK

LD7#17 24.0V_POLYGON_OK
5.0VD
LD8#17 (Voltage Drop, voltage it takes to make electricity flow through a LED
and thus light it up.)
LD9#17 3.3VD

LD10#17 1.2VD
* If these LEDs are off, this does not necessarily mean malfunction of the board.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 9


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

4 PMI52 Power Distribution Board

NOTE:
The following Figure 4 shows the PMI52 Power Distribution Board and the position of
the fuses for quick finding.

Figure 4

IMPORTANT:
(1) Check the fuses listed below.
(2) Replace the PMI52 Power Distribution Board in case one of the fuses is
defective.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 10


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

Fuse name Fuse value Load circuit


F1 2.5AT Optics Fuse -12V

F1#1 2.5AT Optics Fuse +12V

F15 3.5AT 1.5VDC (Volts Direct Current)

F16 3.5AT 3.3VDC

F17 1AT PMT -10V

F18 1AT PMT +20V

F19 1AT PMT +20V

F23 1AT CAN 12V

F24 1AT Analog 8V

F25 7AF 28VDC Input

F27 2AT Polygon 24V

F28 2.5AT 5VDC

F29 1AT Disc

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 11


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

5 IP Handling Board

NOTE:
The following Figure 5 shows the IP Handling Board and the position of the switches
and fuses for quick finding.

Figure 5

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 12


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

Switch Meaning
ON = normal operation (= default)
S1 / 1
OFF = debug position. Only for R&D purpose.
S1 / 2 Not used.

IMPORTANT:
(1) Check the fuse F8.
(2) Replace the vacuum pump and the fuse F8 in case the fuse is defective.
The fuse F8 will be delivered with the spare part vacuum pump with order
number*: CM+9 5170 4290 2
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

Fuse name Fuse value Load circuit


F8 7AF Supply voltage for vacuum pump

(3) Check the fuses listed below.

Fuse name Fuse value Load circuit


Logic power supply
F1#4 1AT
included in 5V DC/DC converter module
F1#16 5AT Step-up converter for slowscan drive SM0

F1#17 5AT Step-up converter for linear transport SM1


Supply for various actors (fan, SM2A,
F7 5AT
SM2B, SM3A, SM3B, SM4A, SM4B)

(4) Replace the IP Handling Board in case one of the fuses is defective.
(5) Check the conditions indicated by the LEDs.

LED Meaning
LD1 Red: ON if power for the board available.
Watchdog-LED
LD2 LED blinking: Software is up and running.
LED steadily on: Software not running: FAILURE
LD3 Currently no function

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 13


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

6 Erasure LED Control Board

NOTE:
The following Figure 6 shows the LED Control Board and the position of the fuses for
quick finding.

F5 F2

F4 F3

Figure 6

IMPORTANT:
(1) Check the fuses listed below.
(2) Replace the complete Erasure Unit in case one or more fuses are defective.

Fuse name Fuse value Load circuit


F2 5AT LEDs 1-60 red

F3 5AT LEDs 61-120 red

F4 5AT LEDs 121-180 blue

F5 1AT Logic Supply

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 14


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

7 Status Indicator on the User Interface Board

NOTE:
The following Figure 7 shows the Status Indicator of the User Interface Board.

Status
Indicator
Lamp

Figure 7

Status Indicator Digitizer Status Action


Activating the erasure Enter cassettes into the input buffer
Constant
cycle. for erasing.
Blue
Proceeding the erasure Remove cassettes from Output
Flashing
cycle. buffer.
Stand-by mode Enter cassettes into the input buffer
Constant
(READY) for scanning.
Green Busy with scanning and
Flashing transporting cassette Remove cassettes from output buffer.
and image plate
Check Digitizer touch panel and
workstation display for further
Service mode
information and detailed instructions.
Constant Or:
Or:
Fatal error
Contact an Agfa certified Service
Red Engineer.
Warm up / Self-test Check Digitizer touch panel and
Processing workstation display for further
Flashing information and detailed instructions.
Software down
Error
Table 1: Description of the status indicator lamp

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.4 / 15


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW Version NIM_2000Agfa Company Confidential
Chapter 3.5
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Replacements / Repair Procedures

Document No: DD+DIS001.10E

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200

DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000

Purpose of this Document


This document describes the replacement steps of parts including the verification
method of each replacement. When applicable, references to DX-G / DX-M Service
Manual Chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations are made.
For the replacements described in this chapter it is necessary to have the relevant tools
available. There is a basic service tools set defined in DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.2: Tools and auxiliary means that contains all needed tools.

ACTION:
(1) Make sure that the tools of the basic service tools set are available.
(2) Make sure to know the safety notes in chapter 3.1 Safety Guidelines.

IMPORTANT:
Replace only 1 board at a time. Always restart the device after the replacement of
a board before replacing another board.
Never bend the belt too much, never with power and never against his regular
direction.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1
11-2010 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 28963642
eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v07
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

Document History

Edition. Release Changes compared to Edition 2.0*


Revision Date
2.1 11-2010 Updated Section 4.6 Stepper Motor Cassette Transport
(Cassette Transport Drive)
Updated Section 5.2 Traverse Carriage Left / Right
Updated Section 5.4 Snaphook Drive
*Based on DX-G Service Manual Edition 1

Referenced Documents

Document Title
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.1 - Safety Guidelines
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.2 - Tools and auxiliary means
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments and Calibrations
Enclosures For a list of orderable spare parts, which will be delivered with enclosed
replacement instructions, refer to section 1.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 2


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 3


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

LIST OF CONTENTS

1 OVERVIEW TO ENCLOSED REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS ............................................7


2 PANELING................................................................................................................................8
2.1 Replacing the Display Board with Touch Panel ........................................................................9

2.2 Replacing the Front Cover ........................................................................................................9

2.3 Replacing the Lower Buffer Cover ..........................................................................................11

2.4 Replacing the Right Side Cover ..............................................................................................13

2.5 Replacing the Left Side Cover ................................................................................................16

2.6 Replacing the Upper Left Cover..............................................................................................18

2.7 Replacing the Upper Right Cover ...........................................................................................20

2.8 Replacing the Buffer Right Cover ...........................................................................................22

2.9 Replacing the Upper Cover.....................................................................................................25

2.10 Replacing the Buffer Rear Cover ............................................................................................27

2.11 Replacing the Rear Cover.......................................................................................................29

2.12 Replacing the Cassette Input Cover .......................................................................................30

2.13 LED Status Indicator Board ....................................................................................................32

2.14 Fan ..........................................................................................................................................34

2.15 Air Filter ...................................................................................................................................35

3 FRAME AND VACUUM UNIT.................................................................................................37


3.1 Replacing the Power Supply ...................................................................................................37

3.2 Replacing the Vacuum Pump .................................................................................................37

3.3 Interlock Switch .......................................................................................................................38

3.4 Main Switch .............................................................................................................................40

3.5 Vacuum Valve .........................................................................................................................41

3.6 Fixed Vacuum Hose ................................................................................................................43

3.7 Vacuum Pump Sound Absorber .............................................................................................45

4 CHASSIS - CONNECTOR AND SWIVEL DRIVE ..................................................................46


4.1 Replacing the IP Handling Board ............................................................................................46

4.2 Connector Drive ......................................................................................................................46

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 4


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

4.3 Connector Bolt ........................................................................................................................48

4.4 Locking Unit ............................................................................................................................54

4.5 Swivel Drive ............................................................................................................................56

4.6 Stepper Motor Cassette Transport (Cassette Transport Drive) ..............................................66

4.7 Lubricating Chambers .............................................................................................................68

4.8 Slow Scan Reference Sensor .................................................................................................70

5 CHASSIS - IP TRANSPORT ..................................................................................................72


5.1 Traverse with Snap Hooks ......................................................................................................72

5.2 Traverse Carriage Left / Right.................................................................................................74

5.3 IP Feeder Wire Ropes ............................................................................................................76

5.4 Snaphook Drive with Light Barrier ..........................................................................................78

5.5 Linear Transport Belts.............................................................................................................85

6 CHASSIS - IP CARRIER ADAPTER PLATE ..........................................................................87


6.1 Vacuum Plate ..........................................................................................................................87

6.2 Calibration Board ....................................................................................................................89

6.3 Distribution Board ...................................................................................................................91

7 CHASSIS - SCANNING AND ERASURE ...............................................................................92


7.1 Replacing the Optic Module ....................................................................................................92

7.2 Replacing the Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector ............................................93

7.3 Replacing the PMI52 Board ....................................................................................................93

7.4 Replacing the PMI52 Power Distribution Board......................................................................94

7.5 Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................94

7.6 Cleaning Brush .......................................................................................................................96

7.7 Replacing the Solid State Disk................................................................................................97

8 BUFFER UNIT REAR ..........................................................................................................99


8.1 Replacing the Cassette Transport Belt ...................................................................................99

8.2 Buffer complete .......................................................................................................................99

8.3 Cassette Edge Sensor ..........................................................................................................103

9 BUFFER UNIT FRONT......................................................................................................104


9.1 Replacing the Cassette Handling Board ...............................................................................104

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 5


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

9.2 Rollo Light Seal .....................................................................................................................105

9.3 Stepper Motor Cassette Fixation ..........................................................................................106

9.4 Stepper Motor Opener ..........................................................................................................108

9.5 Z-Sensor ...............................................................................................................................109

9.6 Tag Reader ...........................................................................................................................111

9.7 Buffer Adapter Board ............................................................................................................112

9.8 Antistatic Brush .....................................................................................................................114

9.9 Cassette Grabber ..................................................................................................................115

10 REPLACEMENTS AT CASSETTE: REPLACING A DEFECTIVE ID-CHIP .........................117

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 6


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

1 Overview to enclosed Replacement Instructions

INSTRUCTION:
The Enclosures are delivered with the Spare Part.
For an overview of published Enclosures, please refer to:
GSO Library - General Info - Agfa HealthCare - Publications -
Enclosures - General Enclosures*
* Only applicable for Agfa Employees.
For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa partner.

Spare parts with enclosed replacement instructions are listed in the table below.

Spare Part with enclosed Spare Part Order Number*


replacement instructions
Cassette Handling Board CM+9 5170 5990 1
Cassette Transport Belt CM+9 5170 9810 2
Display Board with Touch Panel CM+9 5170 1445 2
IP Handling Board CM+9 5170 2150 3
Optic Module CM+9 5170 2750 1
PMI52 Board CM+9 5170 3070 2
PMI52 Power Distribution Board CM+9 5170 4120 3
PMT with Light Collector CM+9 5170 3001 0
Power Supply CM+9 5170 9805 2
Vacuum Pump CM+9 5170 4290 3

Additionally available as spare parts for replacements:

Spare Part Spare Part Order Number*


Small Parts Kit (Fixing Material) CM+9 5170 9820 1
Small Parts Kit (Functional Parts) CM+9 5170 9825 1
*The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

For an overview of all other spare parts refer to:


DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 5: Spare Parts List

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 7


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2 Paneling

The following figures show an overview of all covers, which can be replaced.

Front cover , see section 2.2.


Lower Buffer cover , see section 2.3.
Right side cover , see section 2.4. 1
2

Figure 1

Left side cover , see section 2.5.


6
Upper left cover , see section 2.6. 5 7

Upper right cover , see section 2.7. 4 8


Buffer right cover , see section 2.8.
Upper cover , see section 2.9.

Figure 2

Buffer rear cover , see section 2.10.


9
Rear cover , see section 2.11.

10

Figure 3

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 8


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.1 Replacing the Display Board with Touch Panel

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


The replacement instructions for the
Display Board with touch panel,
spare part number* CM+9 5170 1445 1,
are enclosed to the spare part.
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is
delivered.
Figure 4

2.2 Replacing the Front Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


DX-G Type 5170 / 100
Front cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1475 2
DX-M Type 5170 / 200
Front cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9888 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare
part is delivered.

Figure 5

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
15 minutes preparation
10 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 9


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open two fast locks.
(4) Open the right cover.

Figure 6

(5) Open fast locks (A) and (B) at front cover.


(6) Remove front cover (C).
A

B C

Figure 7

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the
digitizer is green (= ready).
Status Indicator
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

Figure 8

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 10


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.3 Replacing the Lower Buffer Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Lower Buffer cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9845 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 9

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
15 minutes preparation
10 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Loose screws at rear cover.
(6) Remove 2 screws from the buffer rear cover under the output buffer.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 11


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(7) Hold the lower buffer cover with one hand and remove screws at the lower
buffer cover (see Figure 10).
IMPORTANT:
When all screws were removed, the lower buffer cover can fall
down. Hold the lower buffer to avoid this.

Figure 10

(8) Remove lower buffer cover.

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 12


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.4 Replacing the Right Side Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Right cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1440 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 11

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
15 minutes preparation
10 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open two fastlocks (Figure 12).
(4) Open the right cover.

Figure 12

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 13


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(5) Push clamp to the right and


remove the filter frame.
(6) Remove filter.

Figure 13

(7) Disconnect fan cable from device (A).


B
(8) Remove cables from the
white plastic holders (B). A
(9) Remove 3 Allen screws (C) at the fan.
(10) Remove the fan.

Figure 14

(11) Open right cover as far as possible.


(12) Lift the right cover out of the guidance.
(13) Remove the right cover.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 14


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.


IMPORTANT:
When mounting the air filter. Observe arrows at filter element for airflow
direction. Airflow direction is from outside to inside of the digitizer as
indicated on the frame.

Airflow
Direction

Figure 15

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 15


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.5 Replacing the Left Side Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Left cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1450 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 16

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
15 minutes preparation
10 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open two fast locks.
(4) Open the right cover.

Figure 17

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 16


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(5) Open fast locks (A) and (B) at front cover.


(6) Remove front cover (C) A
D
(7) Open fast locks (D) and (E) at left cover.
B C

Figure 18

(8) Open the left cover as far as possible.


(9) Lift the left cover out of the guidance.

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 17


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.6 Replacing the Upper Left Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Upper left cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1455 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 19

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
15 minutes preparation
10 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open the right cover.
(4) Remove the front cover.
(5) Remove the upper cover.
(6) Unplug plug P50.
(7) Open the left cover.
(8) Remove 3 screws from the upper left cover.
IMPORTANT:
The cover is still connected to
the device with a cable.

Figure 20

(9) Lift upper left cover with LED status indicator board carefully up to get access
to the LED status indicator board inside.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 18


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(10) Remove 2 screws from the cover of the


LED status indicator board.
(11) Remove the cover of the LED status
indicator board.

Figure 21

(12) Pull the LED status indicator board out


of the mounting in the upper left cover.
(13) Remove upper left cover.

Figure 22

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 19


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.7 Replacing the Upper Right Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Upper Right cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1421 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 23

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
15 minutes preparation
10 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Remove lower buffer cover.
(6) Remove Upper cover.
(7) Remove Buffer right cover.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 20


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(8) Remove 3 screws at the upper right cover (see Figure 24).

Figure 24

(9) Remove upper right cover.

NOTE:
Be aware of the connected remounting and mounting the covers.

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 21


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.8 Replacing the Buffer Right Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1430 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered. Figure 25

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
15 minutes preparation
10 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Remove lower buffer cover.
(6) Disconnect cable from the display board (see Figure 26).

Figure 26

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 22


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(7) Remove 1 screw (see Figure 27).

Figure 27

(8) Pull down buffer right cover


carefully and remove it from
the device.

Figure 28

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 23


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(9) Turn the right buffer cover around.


The display board with the touch panel is visible.
(10) Remove 4 screws from the display board (see Figure 29).

Figure 29

(11) Remove the Display board with touch panel.

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.

IMPORTANT:
When reinstalling the Display Board with Touch Panel be sure that Display
Board will be installed in correct direction. Compare mounted Display
Board with Figure 29, before mounting the right buffer cover again.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 24


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.9 Replacing the Upper Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Upper cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1479 2
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 30

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
15 minutes preparation
10 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open two fast locks.
(4) Open the right cover.

Figure 31

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 25


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(5) Open fast locks (A) and (B) at front cover.


(6) Remove front cover (C).
A

B C

Figure 32

(7) Remove 2 screws of the upper cover.


(8) Remove upper cover.

Figure 33

NOTE:
Be aware that the cassette input cover fits into the notch and engages.

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 26


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.10 Replacing the Buffer Rear Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Buffer rear cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1410 2
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 34

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
15 minutes preparation
10 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DISSASEMBLY
(1) Switch off digitizer.
(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Disconnect the Ethernet cable.
(4) Open two fast locks.
(5) Open the right cover.

Figure 35

NOTE:
Be aware of the connected cables remounting and mounting the covers.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 27


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(6) Remove five screws from the left side of


the rear cover.
(7) Loose five screws from the right side of
the rear cover (see Figure 39).
(8) Remove Rear cover.

Figure 36

(9) Remove seven screws from the buffer


rear cover.
(10) Remove rear buffer cover.

Figure 37

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 28


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.11 Replacing the Rear Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Rear cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9830 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 38

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
15 minutes preparation
10 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Switch off digitizer.
(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Unplug network cable.
(4) Open right cover.
(5) Remove five screws from the left side of the
rear cover.
(6) Loose five screws from the right side of the
rear cover (see Figure 39).
(7) Remove Rear cover.
Figure 39

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 29


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.12 Replacing the Cassette Input Cover

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+ F9 5170 9835 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 40

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes:
15 minutes preparation
10 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove upper cover.
(7) Remove upper left cover.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 30


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(8) Remove 2 screws from cassette input cover.

Figure 41

(9) Remove cassette input cover.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

NOTE:
Be aware that the cassette input cover fits into the notch and engages.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 31


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.13 LED Status Indicator Board

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


LED Status Indicator Board with order number*:
CM+9 5170 1460 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part
revision at release of this document. When ordering, the Figure 42
actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
20 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification and
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Switch off digitizer.
(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove upper cover.
(7) Remove plug P50.
(8) Remove 3 screws from the upper left cover.
IMPORTANT:
The cover is still connected to
the device with a cable.
(9) Lift the carefully the upper left cover with LED
status indicator board to get access
to the LED status indicator board inside.
Figure 43

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 32


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(10) Remove 2 screws from the cover of the


LED status indicator board.
(11) Remove the cover of the LED status
indicator board.

Figure 44

(12) Disconnect one cable from the LED Status


Indicator Board.
(13) Pull the LED status indicator board out.

Figure 45

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 33


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.14 Fan

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 4450 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 46

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Switch off digitizer.
(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Disconnect fan power cable.
(5) Remove 3 screws.
(6) Remove fan.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 34


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

2.15 Air Filter

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9855 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 47

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
20 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 35


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Push clamp to the right and
remove the filter frame to the right.
(5) Remove filter.

Figure 48

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
IMPORTANT:
When mounting the air filter. Observe arrows at filter element for airflow
direction. Airflow direction is from outside to inside of the digitizer as
indicated on the frame.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 36


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

3 Frame and Vacuum Unit

3.1 Replacing the Power Supply

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


The replacement instructions for the
Power supply, spare part number*
CM+9 5170 9805 0, are enclosed to the spare
part.

* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare
part revision at release of this document. When ordering, the
actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

Figure 49

3.2 Replacing the Vacuum Pump

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


The replacement instructions for the Vacuum
Pump, spare part number*
CM+9 5170 4290 2, are enclosed to the spare
part.

* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare
part revision at release of this document. When ordering, the
actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

Figure 50

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 37


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

3.3 Interlock Switch

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 0426 6304 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 51

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
20 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 38


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(5) Press retaining clips at both sides.

Figure 52

(6) Pull out interlock switch.


(7) Disconnect cables.
(8) Remove Interlock switch.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Switch on the digitizer.
(3) Open the right door approximately 1 cm (approximately 0.4 inch).
Result: The safety switch has to switch off the digitizer.
If the test fails, the switch is defective and needs to be replaced.
(4) Close right door.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 39


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

3.4 Main Switch

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 0452 3173 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 53

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
20 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove 2 screws at the main switch holder.
(5) Pull out the main switch.
It is still connected to the device with 4
cables.
(6) Disconnect the 4 cables.
(7) Remove main switch.
Figure 54

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 40


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

3.5 Vacuum Valve

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 2360 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 55

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,25 hour:
15 minutes preparation
40 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 41


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove rear cover.
(5) Disconnect cable.
(6) Open 4 screws at vacuum valve with Allen key, which is delivered with the
device.
(7) Remove vacuum valve.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Perform the stall calibration Valve.
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the
NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 42


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

3.6 Fixed Vacuum Hose

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9894 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 56

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 43


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove rear cover.
(5) Open power supply carrier.
(6) Open 2 clamps at fixed vacuum hose.
(7) Remove vacuum hose.

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the
NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 44


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

3.7 Vacuum Pump Sound Absorber

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9895 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 57

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
25 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Switch off digitizer.
(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove rear cover.
(5) Open 2 cable binders from the hose.
(6) Open clamp at vacuum pump.
(7) Remove pump sound absorber.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 45


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

4 Chassis - Connector and Swivel Drive

4.1 Replacing the IP Handling Board

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


The replacement instructions for the
IP Handling board, spare part number*
CM+9 5170 2150 0, are enclosed to the
spare part.

* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare
part revision at release of this document. When ordering,
the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

Figure 58

4.2 Connector Drive

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 2185 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 59

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 46


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes for adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Switch off digitizer.
(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove rear cover.
(5) Cut cable ties at rear cable duct.
(6) Open cable holder.
(7) Remove plug "P7" from IP Handling Board.
(8) Open 3 screws from connector drive.
(9) Remove connector drive.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Perform the stall calibration Connector".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 47


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

4.3 Connector Bolt

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 2190 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 60

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,5 hours:
15 minutes preparation
40 minutes replacement
10 minutes for adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 48


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Start the Service Client on the Control PC.


(2) Select <Analysis & Repair - Move IP Carrier to Maintenance
Position>.
(3) Select <Confirm> at the display of the digitizer.
(4) Click on <Maintenance Position> to move the IP carrier into the respective
position.
For information regarding Service Client refer to Chapter 3.2:
Tools & Auxiliary Means
(5) Switch off digitizer.
(6) Disconnect the mains cable.
(7) Open right cover.
(8) Remove front cover.
(9) Open left cover.

CAUTION:
Optic module electronics can be damaged.
Switch off the digitizer before disconnecting the optic module cable.

(10) Disconnect cable at the optic module.

Figure 61

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 49


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(11) Disconnect five plugs from the PMI52 board.


Also disconnect the optic module cable from the PMI52 board.

Figure 62

(12) Disconnect one plug from the PMI52 power distribution board.
Note that plug is located below the upper left cover.

Figure 63

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 50


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(13) Open the cable holder.

Figure 64

(14) Loosen four screws of the PMI52 board carrier approximately 2 turns.
Note that 1 screw is located below the upper left cover.
(15) Remove PMI52 board carrier.

Figure 65

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 51


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

CAUTION:
The light collector can break when mechanically stressed.
Handle the PMT with light collector with great care.

(16) Open two screws on the left and right of the PMT with light collector.

Figure 66

1
(17) Open the red screw in the top rear of the PMT with light collector.
(18) Lift the Safety Clip 2 on the top while holding the PMT with light collector.

Figure 67

(19) Carefully remove the PMT with light collector by pulling it to the front.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 52


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(20) Unlock 4 black screws of the erasure unit.

Figure 68

(21) Disconnect the cables.


(22) Use the metal handle and pull the erasure unit carefully out of the device.
(23) Remove 2 screws from the upper holder.
IMPORTANT:
Connector Bolt may fall down and destroy light sensors that are located
underneath the connector bolt. When removing the 2 lower screws
keep the bolt with one hand.

(24) Remove 2 screws from the lower holder.


(25) Remove connector bolt.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 53


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
IMPORTANT:
Observe that both connectors are mounted parallel.
(2) Perform the stall calibration Connector".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the
NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

4.4 Locking Unit

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 5600 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 69

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 54


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,25 hours:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes for adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove rear cover.
(7) Remove buffer rear cover.
(8) Remove upper cover.
(9) Remove plug "P37" from cassette handling board.
(10) Remove 2 screws at locking unit.
(11) Remove locking unit.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 55


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Perform the stall calibration Locker".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

4.5 Swivel Drive

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 2120 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.
Figure 70

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,5 hours:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes for adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 56


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Disconnect cable at the optic module.

Figure 71

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 57


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(7) Disconnect five plugs from the PMI52 board.

Figure 72

(8) Disconnect one plug from the PMI52 power distribution board.
Note that plug is located below the upper left cover.

Figure 73

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 58


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(9) Open the cable holder.

Figure 74

(10) Loosen four screws of the PMI52 board carrier approximately 2 turns.
Note that 1 screw is located below the upper left cover.
(11) Remove PMI52 board carrier.

Figure 75

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 59


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

CAUTION:
The light collector can break when mechanically stressed.
Handle the PMT with light collector with great care.

(12) Open two screws on the left and right of the PMT with light collector.

Figure 76
1
(13) Open the red screw in the top rear of the PMT with light collector.
(14) Lift the Safety Clip 2 on the top while holding the PMT with light collector.

Figure 77

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 60


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(15) Carefully remove the PMT with light collector by pulling it to the front.
IMPORTANT:
Handle the Photo Multiplier with Light collector very carefully.
Store it on the straight, metal side (see Figure 78).
Store it on a safe and clean place.
Protect PMT from bright light. Cover the light entrance to protect
the PMT from excessive light entering.

Figure 78

(16) Remove the 4 mounting screws


for the optic module.

Figure 79

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 61


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

CAUTION:
Optics can be polluted.
Handle the optic module very carefully.
Store it flat on a safe and clean place.
Put it the laser emission opening downward to avoid collecting dust.

Figure 80: Storage OK Figure 81: Storage Not OK

(17) Use both handles to pull the


optic module from the two mounting
pins of the optic module.

(18) Remove the optic module.

Figure 82

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 62


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

CAUTION:
Risk of injury.
Be careful with the Optic Module mounting pins after removal of the Optic Module.

Figure 83

(19) Open the cable holders from the


swivel drive connector cable.
(20) Disconnect cable from swivel drive.

Figure 84

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 63


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(21) Remove 2 screws at mounting of


swivel drive.

Figure 85

(22) Remove clip from the left gear.


Important:
Gear is fixed with a driving pin. Take care
not to loose the pin.
(23) Remove gear.

Figure 86

(24) Remove swivel unit.

Figure 87: Removed swivel unit

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 64


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(25) Remove 4 screws from swivel drive.


(26) Remove swivel drive.

Figure 88

CAUTION:
Light collector is fragile: Risk of damage.
When mounting the light collector great care must be taken. Do not touch the surface
of the light collector.

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.


(2) Perform the stall calibration Swivel".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select
examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 65


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

4.6 Stepper Motor Cassette Transport (Cassette Transport Drive)

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 5310 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 89

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,25 hours:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 66


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Switch off digitizer.
(2) Disconnect the mains cable and network cable.
(3) Check the tension of the Cassette Transport Belt.
IMPORTANT:
The replaced Cassette Transport Belt must be mounted with a
similar tension.

(4) Open the right cover.


(5) Remove the rear cover.
(6) Remove the buffer rear cover.
(7) Unplug cable from Stepper Motor Cassette Transport Drive from the extension
cable in the device.
(8) Unplug cable from light barrier.
(9) Open the 4 screws from the mounting of the Cassette Transport Drive.

Figure 90

(10) Remove the mounting of the Cassette Transport Drive including the motor.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 67


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Perform the stall calibration Cassette Transport".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the
NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

4.7 Lubricating Chambers

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9890 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 91

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 68


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,5 hours:
15 minutes preparation
45 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Start the Service Client on the Control PC.


(2) Select <Analysis & Repair - Move IP Carrier to Maintenance
Position>.
(3) Select <Confirm> at the display of the digitizer.
(4) Click on <Maintenance Position> to move the IP carrier into the respective
position.
For information regarding Service Client refer to Chapter 3.2:
Tools & Auxiliary Means
(5) Switch off digitizer.
(6) Disconnect the mains cable.
(7) Open right cover.
(8) Remove front cover.
(9) Open left cover.
(10) Remove Optic Module.
(11) Remove PMI52 Board carrier.
(12) Remove PMT with Light collector.
(13) Remove Vacuum pump.
(14) Remove vacuum plate.
(15) Remove Lubricating chambers.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 69


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

4.8 Slow Scan Reference Sensor

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 2585 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 92

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.
IMPORTANT:
Sensor is adjusted and may only be replaced together with its holder (as it is coming
from spare parts stock).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 70


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Start the Service Client on the Control PC.
(2) Select <Analysis & Repair - Move IP Carrier to Maintenance
Position>.
(3) Select <Confirm> at the display of the digitizer.
(4) Click on <Maintenance Position> to move the IP carrier into the respective
position. For information regarding Service Client refer to Chapter 3.2:
Tools & Auxiliary Means
(5) Switch off digitizer.
(6) Disconnect the mains cable.
(7) Open right cover.
(8) Remove front cover.
(9) Open left cover.
(10) Remove optic module.
(11) Remove PMI52 board carrier.
(12) Remove PMT with light collector.
(13) Remove wire ropes and fix it with tape.
(14) Remove Vacuum plate.
(15) Disconnect cable.
(16) Remove sensor.
IMPORTANT:
Do not remove the screw from the sensor. The sensor is adjusted.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.
(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready). This takes
approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 71


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

5 Chassis - IP Transport

5.1 Traverse with Snap Hooks

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 2630 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document. Figure 93
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,25 hours:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes for adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove optic module.
(7) Remove PMI52 board carrier.
(8) Remove PMT with light collector.
(9) Remove 2 screws each at wire rope mounting brackets.
(10) Lift left spring to release traverse.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 72


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(11) Shift traverse slightly up.


(12) Lift right spring to release traverse.
(13) Shift traverse slightly up.
(14) Remove Traverse with snap hooks.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Perform Couple- / uncouple adjustment.
Refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and calibrations for instructions
(3) Perform the stall calibration Wagon".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the
NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 73


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

5.2 Traverse Carriage Left / Right

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9870 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document. When Figure 94
ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
20 minutes replacement
10 minutes for adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

NOTE:
It is not required to replace both carriages if one is defective.
The spare part contains (left/right) due to logistical reasons.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove optic module.
(7) Remove PMI52 board carrier.
(8) Remove PMT with light collector.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 74


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(9) Remove 2 screws each at wire rope mounting brackets.


(10) Lift left spring to release traverse.
(11) Shift traverse slightly up.
(12) Lift right spring to release traverse.
(13) Shift traverse slightly up.
(14) Remove Traverse with snap hooks.
(15) Use waterproof pen to mark position of left and right carriage at Igus rails.
(16) Remove 2 screws at each carriage.
(17) Take off the carriage from the belt.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
IMPORTANT:
Take care to mount the 2 carriages parallel (see marked positions).
(2) Perform the stall calibration Wagon.
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations
(3) Perform the stall calibration Linear Transport".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations
(4) Perform Horizontal traverse adjustment.
Refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations for instructions
(5) Perform Couple / Uncouple adjustment.
Refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations for instructions

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the
NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 75


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

5.3 IP Feeder Wire Ropes

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9875 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 95

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,75 hour:
15 minutes preparation
60 minutes replacement
20 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Switch off digitizer.
(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove optic module.
(7) Remove PMI52 board carrier.
(8) Remove PMT with light collector.
(9) Remove erasure unit.
(10) Remove vacuum valve.
(11) Remove vacuum plate.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 76


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(12) Remove wires manually out of the mounting brackets on the traverse.
(13) Remove IP feeder wire ropes.
IMPORTANT:
Consider the length of the 3 ropes while removing and notice their
positions. The spare ropes must be mounted at the same position.
There should be 2 short ropes for the left and the right side and one
long rope for the middle.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
IMPORTANT:
IP Feeder Wire Ropes must fit into the guidance on the plates.
The center wire has to be in parallel to rail for IP Carrier Adapter
Plate.
Ropes must be mounted in the same arrangement that before
disassembly. See important note above.
Be aware, that springs at the lower pulleys tense the ropes.
(2) Perform the stall calibration Wagon".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations
(3) Perform the stall calibration Valve".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 77


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the
NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

5.4 Snaphook Drive with Light Barrier

IMPORTANT for DX-M Type 5170/200 SN 10001 SN 10041:


When replacing the snaphook drive in a digitizer from SN 10001 up to SN 10041 it is
necessary to order the Parts for Snaphook drive w. LB with order number*:
CM+9517026940 additionally.

NOTE:
The snaphook drive with light barrier requires the digitizer software version NIM_2103
or higher.

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 2692 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 96

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 78


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,25 hours:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes for adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch the digitizer on.


(2) Enter the service menu.
(3) Select: <Analysis & Repair - Move IP Carrier to Maintenance
Position>
(4) Click on <Move IP Carrier to Maintenance Position> to move the IP
carrier into the respective position.
(5) Switch off digitizer.
(6) Disconnect the mains cable.
(7) Disconnect network cable.
(8) Open the right cover.
(9) Remove the rear cover.
(10) Remove front cover.
(11) Open left cover.
(12) Remove PMI52 board carrier.
(13) Remove PMT with light collector.
(14) Remove Erasure Unit.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 79


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(15) Open cable clamps (see figure below).


(16) Cut cable ties from cable duct (see figure below).

Figure 97

(17) Remove plug P11 from IP Handling Board.


(18) Remove plug P26 from IP Handling Board.
(19) Remove 2 screws at snaphook drive. See figure below.
IMPORTANT:
Use a long Allen key to unscrew the 2 screws (Tool from digitizer scope
of delivery can be used).

Figure 98

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 80


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(20) Remove snaphook drive.


IMPORTANT:
Remove the snaphook drive by pulling it carefully to the left side.
(21) Disconnect light barrier cable from snaphook drive.
(22) Check the tape at the bottom of the buffer.
If the tape is detached, stick the tape back to the buffer.

Figure 99

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Connect the cable to the light barrier.
NOTE:
Shrink-on tube must point at the snaphook drive.

Figure 100

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 81


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(3) Guide the light barrier cable and the snaphook drive cable to the back of the
digitizer (see figure below).

Figure 101

(4) Remount the snaphook drive with the captive screws.


NOTE:
Loosely screw on both screws before tighten them completely.

Figure 102

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 82


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(5) Fix the light barrier cable with the cable tie and the screw at the rear side of the
digitizer (see in figure below).

Figure 103

(6) Lay the light barrier cable (1) as shown in the figure below and connect it to
the plug P26 on the IP Handling Board.
(7) Lay the Snaphook Drive cable (2) as shown in the figure below and connect it to
the plug P11 on the IP Handling Board.

Figure 104

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 83


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(8) Close the cable ducts.


(9) Mount the cable ties.
(10) Remount Erasure Unit.
(11) Remount PMT with light collector.
(12) Remount PMI52 Board carrier.
(13) Close left cover.
(14) Mount front cover.
(15) Close right cover.

IMPORTANT:
Do not use the service function
<Preventive Maintenance => Stall Calibration => SM Snaphooks
(M510)> nor use the function <All except M610 & M202> in the same
menu as it includes the snaphook drive. Running these calibration cycles will damage the
snaphook drive.
Background: With the introduction of the light barrier controlled snaphook drive the
calibration of the snaphook stepper motor has become obsolete. However with
NIM_2203 this function is not disabled in the service menu as it should.
All other calibration cycles can be run unaffected.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the
NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 84


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

5.5 Linear Transport Belts

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9880 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document. When
ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

Figure 105

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,5 hours:
15 minutes preparation
40 minutes replacement
20 minutes for adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this
document.
The spare part contains both belts. It is recommended to replace both belts
together.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove rear cover.
(7) Remove vacuum pump.
(8) Remove optic module.
(9) Remove PMI52 board carrier.
(10) Remove PMT with light collector.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 85


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(11) Remove erasure unit.


(12) Remove wire ropes.
(13) Remove Traverse with snap hooks.
(14) Use waterproof pen to mark position of left and right carriage at Igus rails.
(15) Remove Traverse carriage left/right.
(16) Open screw at guide roller left and right approximately 1 turn.
(17) Turn at tensioning screws left and right clockwise a few turns to release
belt tension.
(18) Remove linear transport belts.

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.


IMPORTANT:
IP Feeder Wire Ropes must fit into the guidance on the plates.
The center wire has to be in parallel to rail for
IP Carrier Adapter Plate.
Be aware, that a spring tenses the ropes.
(2) Perform the stall calibration Wagon".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations
(3) Perform the stall calibration Linear Transport".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibration
Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.
(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 86


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

6 Chassis - IP Carrier Adapter Plate

6.1 Vacuum Plate

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 2380 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 106

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,25 hours:
15 minutes preparation
40 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Start the Service Client on the Control PC.
(2) Select <Analysis & Repair - Move IP Carrier to Maintenance
Position>.
(3) Select <Confirm> at the display of the digitizer.
(4) Click on <Maintenance Position> to move the IP carrier into the respective
position.
For information regarding Service Client refer to Chapter 3.2:
Tools & Auxiliary Means

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 87


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(5) Switch off digitizer.


(6) Disconnect the mains cable.
(7) Open right cover.
(8) Remove front cover.
(9) Open left cover.
(10) Remove rear cover.
(11) Open 2 screws of the power supply carrier.
(12) Open the power supply carrier.
(13) Loose four screws of the vacuum valve.
These screws can't be removed.
(14) Remove vacuum valve.
(15) Remove optic module.
(16) Remove PMI52 Board carrier.
(17) Remove PMT with Light collector.
(18) Pull down traverse with snaphooks.
(19) Remove wire ropes.
(20) Mount each wire rope with a tape at the swivel drive axle and the PMT mounting.
This will keep the tension of the wires.
(21) Remove traverse with snaphooks.
(22) Remove calibration board.
(23) Disconnect cable at the calibration board.
(24) Remove 9 screws from vacuum plate.
(25) Remove vacuum plate.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Perform Couple- / uncouple adjustment.
Refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations for instructions.
(3) Perform the stall calibration Wagon".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations
(4) Perform the stall calibration Valve".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations
(5) Perform the stall calibration Swivel".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 88


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

6.2 Calibration Board

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 2990 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 107

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 30 minutes

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

CAUTION:
Device can be damaged.
Always switch off the digitizer before disconnecting or connecting any cable.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 89


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove optic module.
(7) Remove PMI52 Board carrier.
(8) Remove PMT with Light collector.
(9) Remove cable from Calibration board.
(10) Remove screws from calibration.
(11) Remove Calibration board.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

IMPORTANT:
When remounting, mount screws from left to right to reduce tension.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the
NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 90


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

6.3 Distribution Board

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 2490 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 108

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
20 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

CAUTION:
Device can be damaged.
Always switch off the digitizer before disconnecting or connecting any cable.

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Remove rear cover.
(2) Disconnect cables from Distribution board.
(3) Press 3 mounting pins.
(4) Remove Distribution board.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 91


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the
NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

7 Chassis - Scanning and Erasure

7.1 Replacing the Optic Module

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


The replacement instructions for the Optic
Module, spare part number*
CM+9 5170 2750 0, are enclosed to the spare
part.
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 109

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 92


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

7.2 Replacing the Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


The replacement instructions for the Photo
Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector are
enclosed to the spare part.
Spare part number*: CM+9 5170 3000 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 110

7.3 Replacing the PMI52 Board

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


The replacement instructions for the PMI52
board, spare part number* CM+9 5170 3070 1,
are enclosed to the spare part.
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 111

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 93


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

7.4 Replacing the PMI52 Power Distribution Board

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


The replacement instructions for the
PMI52 power distribution board, spare part
number* CM+9 5170 4120 1, are enclosed to
the spare part.
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 112

7.5 Erasure Unit

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Front cover with order number*:
CM+9 5170 3500 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 113

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
20 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 1 of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 94


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Disconnect 2 cables.
(7) Loose 4 black screws of the erasure unit (see Figure 114).

Figure 114

(8) Use the metal handle and pull the erasure unit carefully out of the device.

Figure 115

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 95


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).
(9) Perform shading calibration.
For instructions refer to Chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

7.6 Cleaning Brush

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9160 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 116

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 96


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove optic module.
(7) Remove PMI52 board carrier.
(8) Remove PMT with light collector.
(9) Remove Cleaning brush assembly.
(10) Remove Cleaning brush.

ASSEMBLY:

(1) Mount in reverse order.

7.7 Replacing the Solid State Disk

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Upper left cover with order number*: CM+9 5170 9885 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 10 minutes

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 97


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Remove solid state disk.

Figure 117

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Prepare a USB Memory Stick with the digitizer software.
(3) Switch on the digitizer with inserted USB Memory Stick.
NOTE:
For detailed instructions how to get the software and how to install the
software refer to Chapter 3.2: Tools and auxiliary Means

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 98


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

8 Buffer Unit Rear

8.1 Replacing the Cassette Transport Belt

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


The replacement instructions for the Cassette
Transport Belt, spare part number*
CM+9 5170 9810 0, are enclosed to the spare
part.
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.
Figure 118

8.2 Buffer complete

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 6000 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 119

IMPORTANT:
The buffer should be lifted by 2 persons, as it is heavy (approximately 28 kg).

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,5 hours:
15 minutes preparation
50 minutes replacement
10 minutes adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 99


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 1 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Start the Service Client on the Control PC.
(2) Select <Analysis & Repair - Move IP Carrier to Maintenance
Position>.
(3) Select <Confirm> at the display of the digitizer.
(4) Click on <Maintenance Position> to move the IP carrier into the respective
position. For information regarding Service Client refer to Chapter 3.2:
Tools & Auxiliary Means
(5) Switch off digitizer.
(6) Disconnect the mains cable.
(7) Open right cover.
(8) Remove front cover.
(9) Open left cover.
(10) Remove rear cover.
(11) Remove buffer rear cover.
(12) Remove lower buffer cover.
(13) Remove upper cover.
(14) Remove Buffer right cover.
(15) Remove upper left cover.
(16) Remove upper right cover.
(17) Open cable holders from the buffer.

Figure 120: View from above the digitizer

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 100


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(18) Disconnect 3 cables from Cassette Handling Board.


NOTE:
Every plug is numbered and belongs to one socket. For details refer to
Chapter 4: Reference and circuit diagrams.

(19) Remove 7 Screws at the buffer (see following figures).

Figure 121: View from above the digitizer

Figure 122: View from the right side of the digitizer

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 101


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

CAUTION:
Risk of injury and damaging the device.
Remove or lift-up the buffer with 2 persons. The buffer is heavy (28 kg).

(20) Remove the complete buffer.

Figure 123

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the
NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 102


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

8.3 Cassette Edge Sensor

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5175 9060 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 124

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
25 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove rear cover.
(7) Remove buffer rear cover.
(8) Remove buffer left cover.
(9) Remove Buffer right cover.
(10) Disconnect 3 plugs.
IMPORTANT:
Observe colors and order of the cables.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 103


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(11) Open 2 screws approximately 2 turns.


(12) Remove cassette edge sensor.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
IMPORTANT:
Connect cables in the same colored order, as they were connected
before disassembly.
(2) Perform a cassette edge sensor position adjustment.
For instructions refer to Chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

9 Buffer Unit Front

9.1 Replacing the Cassette Handling Board

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


The replacement instructions for the Cassette
handling board, spare part number*
CM+9 5170 5990 0, are enclosed to the spare
part.
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.
Figure 125

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 104


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

9.2 Rollo Light Seal

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 9896 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 126

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1,25 hours:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes for adjustment
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove rear cover.
(7) Remove buffer rear cover.
(8) Remove lower buffer cover.
(9) Turn at spindle of cassette fixation a few turns until screw of rollo is accessible.
(10) Fix a wire at the rollo.
(11) Pull out the defective rollo.
(12) Fix the wire at spare rollo.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 105


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Perform the stall calibration Calibrate Fixer".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

9.3 Stepper Motor Cassette Fixation

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5175 8660 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 127

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes for adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 106


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove rear cover.
(5) Remove buffer rear cover.
(6) Remove upper left cover.
(7) Remove upper cover.
(8) Open cable holders.
(9) Remove plug "P38" at cassette handling board.
(10) Remove 3 screws.
(11) Remove Stepper motor cassette fixation.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Perform the stall calibration Calibrate Fixer".
For instructions refer to chapter 3.6: Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 107


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

9.4 Stepper Motor Opener

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 5100 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 128

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
20 minutes replacement
10 minutes for adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Remove upper cover.
(6) Remove upper right cover.
(7) Remove buffer right cover.
(8) Remove plug "P35" from Cassette handling board.
(9) Remove 4 screws at motor.
(10) Remove motor.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 108


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

9.5 Z-Sensor

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 5230 1
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 129

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 109


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Open left cover.
(6) Remove PMI52 board carrier.
(7) Remove PMT with light collector.
(8) Remove Erasure unit.
(9) Open cable holder.
(10) Disconnect cable.
(11) Remove 2 screws.
(12) Remove Z-Sensor.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the
NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 110


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

9.6 Tag Reader

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 0486 1417 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 130

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Remove upper cover.
(6) Remove Cassette input cover.
(7) Disconnect cable.
(8) Remove 2 screws.
(9) Remove TAG-Reader.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 111


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the
NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

9.7 Buffer Adapter Board

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5160 4750 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 131

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
25 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 112


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Remove upper cover.
(6) Disconnect cables.
(7) Open plastic holders.
(8) Remove buffer adapter board.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the
NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 113


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

9.8 Antistatic Brush

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 5008 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 132

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
25 minutes replacement
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove front cover.
(5) Remove upper cover.
(6) Remove cassette input cover.
(7) Remove 3 screws from antistatic brush.
(8) Remove antistatic brush.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
IMPORTANT:
Open the 3 screws of the antistatic brush holder a few turns, to mount the
antistatic brush again. This allows easy mounting of the brush.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 114


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Insert cassette in the digitizer.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the
NX processing station.
(7) Reject the image.

9.9 Cassette Grabber

REQUIRED SPARE PART:


Spare part with order number*:
CM+9 5170 5270 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.

Figure 133

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour:
15 minutes preparation
30 minutes replacement
10 minutes adjustment
10 minutes verification
10 minutes customer hand-over

NOTE:
The detailed replacement of the covers is described in section 2 of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 115


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

DISASSEMBLY:

(1) Switch off digitizer.


(2) Disconnect the mains cable.
(3) Open right cover.
(4) Remove rear cover.
(5) Remove buffer rear cover.
(6) Remove 3 mounting screws at cassette
grabber.
(7) Remove 4 screws of cassette grabber
guidance block.
(8) Remove cassette grabber.

ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
(2) Perform a cassette grabber distance adjustment.
See DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.6 - Calibrations & Adjustments.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes.
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select examination type System diagnosis Flatfield.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette formats the customer is using.
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the
NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 116


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

10 Replacements at Cassette: Replacing a defective ID-Chip

REQUIRED TOOL:
Small blunt tool (not sharp-edged) for opening
cassettes.
This tool is delivered with the shipped
cassette.

Figure 134

(1) Press the lock mechanism in cutout 2


of cassette with a blunt tool 2
(not sharp-edged).

(2) Open shutter carefully with both 3


1
thumbs, so the IP cannot be
scratched by the shutter.

pressure 3 pressure
(3) Take out the IP very cautiously
and make sure that it is not
scratched by the shutter . even surface even surface

Figure 135

(4) Place the IP flat on the edge of


a table.

Figure 136

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 117


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures

(5) Release the ID-chip with the help of


a pointed tool (e.g. a ball pen).

Figure 137

(6) Insert the new ID-chip.

(7) Note down the IP serial number, starting


with 302.

Figure 138: Example of a IP serial number

(8) Insert IP in cassette and close cassette.

(9) Re-initialize the ID-chip with the


RF Tag Initialization Tool which is
part of the NX Software.

Figure 139: Example of a IP serial number

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 1 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.5 / 118


11-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Chapter 3.6
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Adjustments and Calibrations

Document No: DD+DIS001.10E

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200

DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000

Purpose of this Document

This document describes all adjustments and calibrations during installation,


maintenance or after replacement of parts for DX-M and DX-G with Software Version
higher than NIM_2000.

Document History

Edition. Release Changes


Revision Date compared to previous Version 2.1
2.2 07-2010 Updated section 3.1 - Shading Calibration
(Figure 19, 3.1.2 Selecting X-Ray Source, AEC Detectors)

Referenced Documents

Document Title
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.2 - Tools and auxiliary Means
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.5 - Replacements
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.7 - Software Menus and Settings

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2
07-2010 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 28868652
eq_03-6_adjustments_e_template_v07
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 2


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

LIST OF CONTENTS

1 OVERVIEW OF ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATIONS.........................................................5


1.1 Adjustments ..............................................................................................................................5

1.2 Calibrations ...............................................................................................................................6

2 ADJUSTMENTS .......................................................................................................................7
2.1 Horizontal Traverse Adjustment................................................................................................7

2.1.1 Preparing the Horizontal Traverse Adjustment.........................................................................7

2.1.2 Performing the mechanical Horizontal Traverse Adjustment .................................................10

2.1.3 Verification of Horizontal Traverse Adjustment.......................................................................12

2.2 Cassette Edge Sensor Adjustment.........................................................................................12

2.3 Cassette Grabber Distance Adjustment .................................................................................15

2.4 Couple Position Adjustment....................................................................................................19

2.4.1 Preparing the Couple Position Adjustment .............................................................................20

2.4.2 Performing the Couple Position Adjustment ...........................................................................21

2.5 Verification ..............................................................................................................................23

3 CALIBRATIONS .....................................................................................................................24
3.1 Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................24

3.1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................24

3.1.2 Selecting X-Ray Source..........................................................................................................27

3.1.3 Select Detector(s) ...................................................................................................................30

3.1.4 Prepare Detector(s) ................................................................................................................31

3.1.5 Performing the Shading Calibration........................................................................................36

3.1.6 Verifying the successful Shading Calibration..........................................................................43

3.2 Stall Calibration .......................................................................................................................46

4 PERFORMING A BACKUP ....................................................................................................48


5 APPENDIX..............................................................................................................................49
5.1 Changes in Shading Calibration Procedure in case Full Leg/Full Spine (FLFS) Cassette is
used ........................................................................................................................................49

5.2 Troubleshooting of a not successful Shading Calibration.......................................................51

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 3


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

5.2.1 Underexposed Message .........................................................................................................51

5.2.2 Overexposed Message ...........................................................................................................51

5.2.3 Dust detected Message ..........................................................................................................52

5.2.4 Non-continuous Calibration Message.....................................................................................52

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 4


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

1 Overview of Adjustments and Calibrations

REQUIRED TOOLS:
Refer to the tools that are listed in the respective sections of Adjustments and
Calibrations.

REFERENCED DOCUMENTS:
DD+DIS008.10E:
''Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with Light Collector Replacement Instructions'',
delivered with the PMT.
Enclosure DD+DIS007.10E:
''Optic Module Replacement Instructions'', delivered with the optic module.
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 3.5 - Replacements
DX-G / DX-M Service Manual, Chapter 09 - Maintenance

1.1 Adjustments

The following table lists the required adjustment tasks:

Adjustment Types Use case Section


Horizontal Traverse Replacement of: 2.1
Adjustment
Linear Transport Drive or
Linear Transport Belt
Cassette Grabber Distance Cassette Grabber has been replaced. 2.2
Adjustment
Cassette Edge Detection Cassette Edge Sensor has been replaced. 2.3
Adjustment
Couple- / Uncouple Adjustment Replacement / Removal of: 2.4
Wagon or
Traverse with Snaphooks or
Vacuum Plate or
IP Carrier Adapter Plate

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 5


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

1.2 Calibrations

The following table lists the required calibration tasks:

Calibration Types Use case Section


Shading calibration The Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) with light 3.1
collector has been replaced.
The Optic Module has been replaced.
Whenever stripes in slow scan direction
are visible, which cannot be removed by
cleaning of the light collector with the cleaning
brush.
NOTE:
Shading calibration is not necessary, if the
Optic Module or Photo Multiplier Module is
dismounted and remounted into the same
device again, e.g. during a maintenance.

Stall Calibration After replacements of: 3.2


IP Handling Board
Cassette Handling Board
After replacements of the following assemblies
or parts of it (belts, motors, gears etc.):
o Locking Unit
o Cassette Fixation (as part of Buffer Unit)
o Vacuum Valve
o Connector Drive
o Snaphook Drive
o Swivel Drive
o Linear Transport
o Cassette Transport (in the buffer unit)
o IP Carrier Adapter Plate

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 6


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

2 Adjustments

2.1 Horizontal Traverse Adjustment

When Perform the horizontal traverse adjustment after replacement of the:


Linear Transport Drive
Linear Transport Belt

Purpose Adjust the horizontal traverse to avoid Image Plate transportation problems.

REQUIRED TOOLS:
The Standard Tools are defined in chapter 3.2 of the
DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation.

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour

2.1.1 Preparing the Horizontal Traverse Adjustment

NOTE:
The steps (1) - (4) are described in detail in chapter 3.5.

Required (1) Switch off digitizer.


steps
(2) Disconnect the mains and network cable.
B
(3) Open right cover (A). A
(4) Remove front cover (B).

Figure 1

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 7


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

CAUTION:
Optic module electronics can be damaged.
Only disconnect the optic module cable when the digitizer is switched off.

(5) Disconnect cable at the optic module.

Figure 2

(6) Remove the 4 mounting screws


for the optic module.

Figure 3

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 8


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

CAUTION:
Optics can be damaged or polluted.
Handle the optic module very carefully.
Store it on a safe and clean place.
Put it the laser emission opening downward to avoid collecting dust.

(7) Use both handles to pull the


optic module from the two
mounting pins of the optic module.

(8) Remove the optic module.

Figure 4

CAUTION:
Risk of injury.
Be careful with the Optic Module mounting pins after removal of the Optic Module.

Figure 5

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 9


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

2.1.2 Performing the mechanical Horizontal Traverse Adjustment

CAUTION:
Light collector can be damaged: Reduced image quality.
Be sure, the swivel drive is in home position before pulling the transport belt.

Figure 6

(1) Pull left transport belt (see Figure 7) carefully downwards, until the traverse
and the L-bracket of the IP carrier adapter plate are on the same level
(see Figure 7).

(2) Check gap between L-bracket and upper stop position (see Figure 7).
Evaluation:
If there is no gap left and right visible: No further actions are required.
If there is a gap on the left and/or right side, continue with step (3).

Figure 7

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 10


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(3) Open 3 screws at fixation ring (see Figure 8).


(4) Turn the gear clockwise (traverse goes down) or counterclockwise (traverse goes
up) on the bush, until the gap between L-bracket and upper stop position is
correct. Details for evaluation are described in step (2).
(5) Fasten 3 screws at the fixation ring.

Bush

Fixation Ring

Gear

Position Indicator
Long Hole

Figure 8

(6) Pull left transport belt carefully up and down a few centimeters to check
the gaps again. Details for evaluation are described in step (3).
(7) Repeat steps (2) - (6) if a gap still exists.
(8) Remount optic module.
(9) Remount covers.
(10) Reconnect mains and network cable.
(11) Perform a stall calibration as described in section 3.2.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 11


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

2.1.3 Verification of Horizontal Traverse Adjustment

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the digitizer shows the ready screen (takes approximately 3 minutes).
(3) Insert an unexposed detector in the ID tablet.
(4) At the NX workstation select examination type System diagnosis Flat field.
(5) Insert detector in the digitizer. The digitizer starts scanning.
(6) Confirm that the image arrives at the Control PC.
(7) Click <Reject image>.
(8) Repeat steps (3) - (7) for every available detector format at customer site.

Result The Horizontal Traverse Adjustment is performed.

2.2 Cassette Edge Sensor Adjustment

When Perform the detector edge sensor adjustment after replacement of the detector edge
sensor.

Purpose Adjust the switch position: The detector edge sensor should reliably detect whether the
detector is inserted.

REQUIRED TOOLS:
The Standard Tools are defined in chapter 3.2 of the
DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation.

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 30 minutes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 12


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT:

(1) Insert a detector in the right way:


Black side to the user and the shutter inside the digitizer

Tube side of
the cassette

Shutter opening and


locking mechanism

Figure 9

(2) Push the detector with one hand to the left side of the digitizer.
The detector edge sensor has to switch and a "click" sound must be audible.
NOTE:
Switching of the detector edge sensor can also be checked
with a multimeter.

Evaluation:
If the sensor switches and a sound is audible: No further action is required.
If the sensor does not switch and no sound is audible:

o Switch off digitizer.


o Open right cover (A). D
B
o Remove front cover (B). A C

o Open left cover (C).


o Remove upper left cover (D).
Figure 10

o Open the screws at the detector edge sensor approximately 2


turns.
o Push the detector edge sensor more to the right side.
o Repeat steps (1) and (2).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 13


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(3) Insert a detector the wrong way (red or gray side to the user).
In this way the position of the Cassette Edge Sensor can be cross checked.

Shutter opening and


locking mechanism

Figure 11

(4) Push the detector to the left.


The detector edge sensor may not switch, then no sound may be audible.
Evaluation:
If the sensor does not switch and a no sound is audible: No further action is
required.
If the sensor switches and a sound is audible:
o Switch off digitizer.
o Open right cover.
o Remove front cover.
o Open left cover.
o Remove upper left cover.
o Open the screws at the detector edge sensor.
o Push the detector edge sensor more to the left side.
o Repeat steps (3) and (4).

(5) Insert a detector again in the right way (black side to the user and the shutter
inside the digitizer).
(6) Check the position of the detector edge sensor with proper inserted detector
again according to step (1) and (2).
(7) Remount the covers.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 14


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Switch on digitizer.


(2) Wait until the digitizer is ready.
(3) Insert a detector in the right way.
(4) The detector should be processed correctly. Otherwise repeat adjustment of the
detector edge sensor.
(5) Insert a detector in the wrong way.
(6) The detector should not be processed and the message "wrong detector"
appears on the digitizer display. Otherwise repeat adjustment of the detector
edge sensor.

Result The cassette edge sensor adjustment is performed.

2.3 Cassette Grabber Distance Adjustment

When Perform the cassette grabber distance adjustment after replacement of the cassette
grabber.

Purpose Adjust the cassette grabber distance, so that it reliably grabs the cassette
in the right way.

REQUIRED TOOLS:
The Standard Tools are defined in chapter 3.2 of the
DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation.
Grabber distance adjustment gauge (part of delivery of the cassette grabber
spare part delivery with order number*: CM+9 5170 5270 0).
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 30 minutes

NOTE:
The cassette grabber position is adjusted with help of an adjustment gauge.
This gauge must be positioned, that the cassette grabber front surface is in line with
the front surface of the gauge.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 15


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT:
(1) Remove the Upper Cover, for details refer to chapter 3.5:
Replacements / Repair Procedures

(2) Pull at belt (A) to open cassette


slot (B) completely.
A

Figure 12

(3) Hold the grabber distance


adjustment gauge to the grabber.
IMPORTANT:
Take care that the
gauge does not fall into
the digitizer.

Figure 13

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 16


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(4) Check the distance between grabber and grabber distance adjustment gauge.
The hook has to be inline with the gauge.

Evaluation:
If the distance is OK: No further action required.
If the distance is not OK: Continue with step (5).

Grabber distance
Grabber adjustment
distance adjustment gauge gauge

NOT OK

OK

NOT OK

Figure 14

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 17


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(5) Open the mounting screws of the cassette grabber.

Figure 15

(6) Move cassette grabber forward or backward, until position is OK.


See Figure 14.
(7) Fasten cassette grabber mounting screws.

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the digitizer shows the ready screen (takes approximately 3 minutes).
(3) Insert an unexposed 35 x 43 cm detector in the ID tablet.
(4) Identify detector and insert in digitizer.
(5) Confirm that the image arrives at the Control PC.
(6) Reject the image.

Result The cassette grabber distance adjustment is performed.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 18


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

2.4 Couple Position Adjustment

When Perform the couple position adjustment after the replacement of:
Vacuum Plate
Traverse Carriage
Traverse with snaphooks

Purpose Check and adjust the IP Carrier to ensure that coupling/uncoupling of traverse and
wagon works as defined by default.

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 minutes (including removal of Optic Module and Photomultiplier
Module)

REQUIRED TOOLS:
The Standard Tools are defined in chapter 3.2 of the
DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation.

IMPORTANT:
The mechanical adjustment will be initialized via the service software. There is no
manual mechanical adjustment necessary.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 19


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

2.4.1 Preparing the Couple Position Adjustment

NOTE:
For detailed instructions refer to DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.5 "Replacements" and previous sections in this document.

(1) Switch off digitizer.


Leave mains cable and network cable connected.
(2) Open the right cover.
(3) Remove front cover.
(4) Open left cover.
(5) Disconnect cable from optic module.
(6) Remove optic module.
(7) Disconnect cables from PMI52 board and PMI52 Power distribution board.
(8) Remove PMI52 board carrier.
(9) Remove Photomultiplier Module.
(10) Check, that:
The traverse is in front of the vacuum plate.
The vacuum plate is in back position.

IMPORTANT:
Move the traverse manually in front of the vacuum plate, if these
conditions are not fulfilled.

(11) Remount PMI52 board carrier.

NOTE:
PMI52 board and PMI52 Power distribution must be mounted so that
device can be switched on.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 20


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

2.4.2 Performing the Couple Position Adjustment

IMPORTANT:
The mechanical adjustment will be initialized via the service software.
Make sure, that device is completely assembled except of Optic Module, and
Photomultiplier Module with light collector.

(1) Close right cover.


(2) Switch on the digitizer.
Digitizer will start in a service mode, which allows accessing the service menu
with removed optic module.
(3) Confirm the error code message with <OK>.
The digitizer starts with error code 14857, because the optic module is not
mounted.

(4) Start the service menu in the local display of the digitizer.
For more information concerning the service software and how to access the
service menu refer to DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation Chapter 3.7
"Software menus and settings".
(5) Select <Analysis & Repair Couple Position > in the service menu.

Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > Couple Position

Adjust Couple Position by selecting replaced module:

Check couple position visually:

Drive Traverse Carriage in/out

This adjustment takes approx. 5 minutes.


Performing Stall Calibration
Checking distance Y
Adjustment finished.

Figure 16

(6) Select replaced part.


(7) Wait approximately 4 minutes till the adjustment has finished.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 21


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

Verification (1) Select <Drive Traverse Carriage in/out> in the service menu to
check the adjustment visually. The wagon uncouples and drives down and
back to the traverse. The wagon couples again.
(2) Check that:
Couple procedure runs smoothly.
Wagon connects completely into the traverse.
Traverse makes a slightly move back and forward when coupling.
This should be a very smooth movement.

Figure 17

(3) If the check is not satisfying, repeat the adjustment.


(4) Select <Cancel> to go back to the main menu.
(5) Switch off the digitizer.
(6) Remove PMI52 board carrier.
(7) Remount Photomultiplier Module.
(8) Remount PMI52 board carrier and connect all cables to the PMI52 board.
(9) Remount Optic Module.
(10) Close the digitizer.

Result The couple/uncouple adjustment is performed.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 22


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

2.5 Verification

Verification (1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the status indicator lamp on the
digitizer is green (= ready).
This takes approximately 3 minutes. Status Indicator
(3) Insert an unexposed cassette in the
ID tablet.
(4) At the processing station select
examination type System diagnosis Flat
field.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) for all cassette
formats the customer is using.
Figure 18
(6) Insert cassette(s) in the digitizer.
(7) Confirm that the image(s) arrives at the
NX processing station.
(8) Reject the image(s).

Result The couple/uncouple adjustment is performed.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 23


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

3 Calibrations

3.1 Shading Calibration

3.1.1 Introduction

NOTE:
The digitizer has been calibrated in the factory using a GenRad modality for NIP
(Needle IP) and PIP (Powder IP) detectors with format 35 x 43 cm. This also covers the
calibrations for Mammo NIP and Mammo PIP.

When Perform in the following cases:


After replacement of the PMT with light collector
After replacement of the optic module
Whenever stripes in slow scan direction are visible, which cannot be removed
by cleaning of the light collector with the cleaning brush.
Mammography NIP detector(s) will be used instead of Mammography PIP and
vice versa (if applicable).
Scope of application changes from Mammography Only Use to Mixed Use
(Mammography and General Radiology use) and vice versa.

Purpose Remove signal inhomogeneities along the scan line.

3.1.1.1 Workflow of Shading Calibration

ACTION:
Perform the shading calibration by following steps in Figure 15 on the next page.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 24


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

Workflow for shading calibration procedure

Digitizer is used for:

1
GenRad or Mixed Use
Mammography only
(GenRad and Mammography)

Use GenRad Use Mammography


X-Ray Source X-Ray Source

Select largest available GenRad NIP2 Select Mammography detectors with


and GenRad PIP3 detector(s), size 24x30 cm and 18x24 cm.
preferably 35x43 cm. Use only one type of IP4, NIP or PIP!

Prepare GenRad detector(s): Prepare Mammography detector(s):


- Clean and Check Image Plate. - Clean and Check Image Plate.
- Erase detector(s). - Erase detector(s).
- Expose detector(s). - Expose detector(s).

Check which IP Type is set in the


digitizer settings:
Mammo PIP or Mammo NIP

Perform shading calibration procedure


Perform shading calibration procedure
with Mammography detector
with GenRad PIP (if available).
with size 24x30 cm.

Perform shading calibration procedure


Perform shading calibration procedure
with Mammography detector
with GenRad NIP (if available).
with size 18x24 cm.

Mammography IP Type Mammography IP Type


and GenRad IP Type and GenRad IP Type
are the same are different
(e.g. GenRad PIP and (e.g. GenRad PIP and
Mammo PIP). Mammo NIP).

Verify shading calibration procedure.

1 GenRad: General Radiology


2 NIP: Needle Image Plate
3 PIP: Powder Image Plate
4 IP: Image Plate

Figure 19: Workflow for shading calibration procedure

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 25


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

IMPORTANT:
Some Steps of the shading calibration are only applicable for Mammography Use.
See workflow chart on page 24 for an overview.

Main steps to perform a shading calibration:

# Task Section
1 Selecting X-Ray Source 3.1.2
2 Selecting Detector(s) 3.1.3
For GenRad and Mixed Use 3.1.3.1
For Mammography Only Use 3.1.3.2
3 Preparing Detector(s) 3.1.4
Cleaning and Checking the Image Plate 3.1.4.1
Erasing the Cassette 3.1.4.2
Exposing the Cassette 3.1.4.3
4 Performing the Shading Calibration 3.1.5
For GenRad and Mixed Use 3.1.5.1
For Mammography Only Use 3.1.5.2
5 Verifying the Shading Calibration 3.1.6

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 26


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

3.1.1.2 Required Tools

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR GENRAD AND MIXED USE:


1,5 mm Cu Filter with order number*: CM+9 5155 1015 2
CR Screen Cleaner with order number*: 10+9 9999 1197 0 or
ABC-Code: EQP6D
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

Lint free cloth


Largest PIP and NIP detector(s) that are available at site
(recommended: 35 x 43 cm).

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MAMMOGRAPHY ONLY USE:


2,0 mm AL Filter with order number*: CM+9 5148 1090 0
Prosat Wipes with order number*: 10+9 9999 1219 0 or ABC-Code: ETRTM
for Mammo PIP
Polynit Wipes with order number*: 10+9 9999 1273 0 or ABC-Code: 5PCZF for
Mammography NIP
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

Lint free cloth


Mammography PIP or Mammography NIP detector with format 24 x 30 cm
Mammography PIP or Mammography NIP detector with format 18 x 24 cm
(must be same image plate type than the 24 x 30 cm detector)

3.1.2 Selecting X-Ray Source

ACTION:
Select the X-Ray Source A or B:
A) For GenRad or Mixed Use (GenRad and Mammography):

Use GenRad Modality.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 27


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

IMPORTANT:
Do not perform a shading calibration with the CR HD5.0 AEC General
Detectors.

NOTE:
In Mixed Use it is possible that an additional Mammography only
shading calibration is necessary (refer to table below).
If a Mammography only calibration is necessary, follow the selection
procedure on the next page.

The following table shows the required shading calibrations for the different
Image Plate types and Modalities in Mixed Use.
The symbol means, that a shading calibration is required.
The symbol means, that no shading calibration is required.

Type of Image Plates Required Shading Calibration Procedure


used at site
GenRad GenRad Mammography
PIP NIP only
GenRad PIP and GenRad NIP, 1,2
Mammo NIP and Mammo PIP
GenRad PIP and GenRad NIP, 2
Mammo NIP
GenRad PIP and GenRad NIP, 1
Mammo PIP
1
GenRad PIP, Mammo PIP
2
GenRad NIP, Mammo NIP
GenRad PIP, Mammo NIP
GenRad NIP, Mammo PIP
1
GenRad PIP shading calibration is automatically generating a shading calibration for
Mammo PIP (both sizes).
2
GenRad NIP shading calibration is automatically generating a shading calibration for
Mammo NIP (both sizes).

NOTE:
In case only full leg full spine (FLFS) cassettes are available, refer to
appendix of this document. If a large GenRad cassette is available,
always use this one for shading calibration.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 28


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

B) For Mammography Only:

Use Mammography Modality.

IMPORTANT:
Follow this selection procedure for "Mammography Only" modality:
(1) Check, which type of Mammography modalities the customer
has in use.
(2) Choose the Mammography modality, which should be used for
the next sections, after the following selection process:
1. If Siemens Mammomat modality is available,
always use Siemens Mammomat modality.
2. If GE DMR is available and no Siemens is available,
use GE DMR.
3. If Instrumentarium is available and no Siemens Mammomat
modality and no GE DMR is available,
use Instrumentarium modality.
4. If no Siemens Mammomat modality, no GE DMR and no
Instrumentarium Modality is available,
use other Mammography modalities.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 29


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

3.1.3 Select Detector(s)

3.1.3.1 GenRad or Mixed Use

NOTE:
Perform the Shading Calibration for GenRad or Mixed Use with the largest available
detectors:
If NIP (Needle-structured Image Plate) and PIP (Powder-structured Image Plate)
are in use, always perform the shading calibration for both types.
If GenRad and FLFS (Full leg full spine) detectors in size 35 x 43 cm are
available, use GenRad Cassette.
If IP types of used GenRad and Mammography Image Plates differ, always
perform a Mammography only shading calibration additionally.

ACTION:
Select the largest available PIP (red cover) or NIP (gray cover) detector.
NOTE:
If a shading calibration for GenRad application is needed use a large
GenRad detector. If there is no large GenRad detector available use the
FLFS detector. Refer to the appendix, section 5.1 for more details.

3.1.3.2 Mammography Only Use

IMPORTANT:
The DX-M only performs one type of Mammography image plates simultaneously.
Mammo NIP and Mammo PIP detectors cannot be used together.

(1) Select the Mammo NIP or Mammo PIP detector with format 24 x 30 cm
(if used on site).
(2) Select Mammo detector with format 18 x 24 cm (if used on site).
NOTE:
This detector must be the same IP type that was chosen in step (1).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 30


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

3.1.4 Prepare Detector(s)

3.1.4.1 Cleaning and Checking of the Image Plate

(1) Open the detector with the dedicated key


or a pen.

Figure 20

(2) Fix the shutter 1 with both thumbs and


let the image plate slide out carefully onto 1

a table 2 . 2

Figure 21

(3) Put the image plate onto the detector.


The image plate has little hooks (see
Figure 22) to fix the Image Plate.
Put the Image Plate on the detector so
that the hooks are hanging over the
border of the detector. With this procedure
a bending of the Image Plate is avoided.

Figure 22

(4) Check the image plate for scratches and pollution:


If scratches are visible, take another detector.
Inform the customer about the detection of scratches.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 31


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(5) Clean the image plate according to image plate type:


For GenRad NIP and GenRad PIP clean the image plate
(white phosphor side) by wiping gently with CR Screen Cleaner
(order number* 10+9 9999 1197 0 or ABC-Code: EQP6D) over the whole
surface using a lint free cloth.
For Mammo NIP use the polynit wipes (order number* 10+9 9999 1273 0
or ABC-Code 5PCZF) and CR Screen Cleaner.
For Mammo PIP use the prosat wipes (order number* 10+9 9999 1219 0
or ABC-Code ETRTM).
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

1
White phosphor
White phosphor side side

2 Black tube
Black tube side side
of the cassette

Of the cassette

Figure 23

IMPORTANT:
Do not put the CR Screen
Cleaner directly on the image
plate.
Always put the CR Screen
Cleaner on the lint free cloth
or the polynit wipe.

Figure 24

(6) Wait approximately 5 minutes until the surface is dry.


(7) Verify that the white phosphor side is oriented to the black tube side of the
detector.
(8) Put the image plate back into the detector so that the shutter does not scratch
over the image plate.
(9) Insert the key (or pen) into the detector.
(10) Close the shutter.
(11) Remove the key.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 32


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

3.1.4.2 Erasing the Cassette

(1) Press the Erase button on the touch panel


at the front side of the digitizer.
The digitizer switches to erase mode.
The status indicator lamp on the left side
of the device is continuously lighting up in
blue.

Erase Button
Erase

Figure 25: Digitizer touch panel

(2) Put the detector in the detector buffer of


Tube side of
the digitizer. the cassette
As a result, the digitizer starts erasing
the image plate and the status indicator Shutter opening and
is blinking blue. locking mechanism

After erasing, the detector is moved to


the detector output buffer.
The digitizer is remaining in Erase
mode for 10 seconds staying constantly
blue. Figure 26
This allows processing more detectors
in a row.
The digitizer automatically switches to
constant green if no additional detector
is entered meanwhile.

(3) Remove the detector with the erased image plate from the
detector output buffer.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 33


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

3.1.4.3 Exposing the Cassette

(1) Mount the filter at the modality:


For GenRad and Mixed Use mount the Cu Filter at the GenRad modality.
For Mammography Use mount the Al Filter at the Mammography modality.
IMPORTANT:
Use the Cu Filter only at the GenRad modality and use the Al Filter
only at the Mammography modality. Never use it vice versa!

(2) Expose the prepared detector(s) according to table on the next page.

NOTE:
There is an over- and underexposure tolerance.
The digitizer automatically checks for under- or overexposure and
prompts an error respectively:
If no error was shown, the exposure is in a valid dose range.
If an error was shown, refer to the appendix of this document.

IMPORTANT:
For exposure place the long side of the detector parallel to the
anode axis.

Anode
axis

OK Not OK
Figure 27

Exposed area
NOTE:
The entire image plate must
Image Plate Image Plate
be fully exposed! The
collimated field must be
larger than the image plate!
OK Not OK
Figure 28

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 34


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

X-Ray Source Exposure conditions per detector


GenRad It is recommended to expose the detector two times with 10 Gy
X-Ray Source to achieve a good evenness.
(1) Expose the detector with following typically values:
12 mAs
75 kVp
1.3 m distance
Large focus
1.5 mm copper filter (Cu)

(2) Turn the detector 180 and expose it again.

Mammography Only 1 exposure is necessary. The detector should not be rotated.


X-Ray Source
(1) Remove the compression paddle before the exposure.
(2) Tape the Al Filter at the tube exit.
NOTE:
The adhesive tape must not be in the X Ray beam.

(3) Expose the detector with the typically values:


200 mAs
28 kV
Molybdenium source / Molybdenium filter (Mo/Mo)
Large focus
2.0 mm aluminium filter

NOTE:
If the image is overexposed select next possible
lower mAs setting on the Mammography modality.
If the dose has to be decreased due to
overexposure, the settings must not fall below
50 mAs and 0.5 seconds.
The setting will lead to a detector dose of
approximately 350 Gy or 40 mR.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 35


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

3.1.5 Performing the Shading Calibration

3.1.5.1 GenRad and Mixed Use

(1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Start the service menu. For more information concerning the service software
and how to access the service menu refer to DX-G / DX-M Service
Documentation Chapter 3.7 "Software menus and settings".
(3) Select <Preventive Maintenance Calibration> in the service menu.
(4) Select <Genrad X-Ray Modality available>.

Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration

Genrad X-Ray Modality available

Mammo X-Ray Modality available only

Figure 29: Shading Calibration Start Screen

(5) Confirm with <OK>.


NOTE:
The next screen that will be displayed is an information screen with
exposure instructions. For more information concerning exposure
conditions refer to the previous sections of this document.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 36


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at


Genrad X-Ray Modality

- Select largest available Genrad NIP / PIP cassette (35 x 43 cm).


- Check image plate(s).

- Using the 1,5 mm CU-filter expose cassette(s) as follows:


- Dose 20 G in 2 fractions of 10 G (rotate 180 )

- Do not identify cassette(s).


- Do not use FLFS cassette.
- Insert exposed cassette in input slot.

Figure 30: Shading Calibration short instructions on the local


display of the digitizer

(6) Insert the exposed GenRad PIP detector with format 35 x 43 cm into the
digitizer. The Image Plate will be scanned and erased automatically.
A shading calibration status screen appears in the display.
IMPORTANT:
Watch the information screen for status messages. If an error occurs
or a user action is necessary it will displayed here. In case of an
error refer to the appendix of this document.

Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at

Display messages here, e.g. waiting for cassette input,


Scanning image plate, processing data, shading calibration
successful etc.

Figure 31: Information Screen during shading calibration

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 37


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(7) Wait till the digitizer has finished scan and erase cycle.
(8) Confirm with <OK>.
Shading Calibration result will be displayed on the screen.

Service Menu: Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at


Genrad X-Ray Modality

Shading Calibration Result:


Genrad PIP
18 x 24 cm Mammo PIP
24 x 30 cm Mammo PIP

Figure 32: Result Screen after shading calibration with PIP

(9) Confirm with <OK>.


(10) Repeat steps (3) to (8), if GenRad NIP detectors are available.
(11) When the digitizer is finished, exit the service menu.
(12) Remove the filter from the modality.

IMPORTANT:
If GenRad and Mammography IP types differ, a Mammography only shading
calibration has to be performed additionally. Follow instructions in next section.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 38


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

3.1.5.2 Mammography Only

(1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Start the service menu. For more information concerning the service software
and how to access refer to DX-G / DX-M Service Documentation Chapter 3.7
"Software menus and settings".
(3) Select <Preventive Maintenance Calibration> in the service menu.
(4) Select <Mammo X-Ray Modality only>.

Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration

Genrad X-Ray Modality available

Mammo X-Ray Modality available only

Figure 33: Shading Calibration Start Screen

(5) Confirm with <OK>.


NOTE:
The next screens that will be displayed are information screens with
exposure instructions and shading calibration information.
For more details refer to the previous sections.

Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at Service Menu: Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at
Mammo X-Ray Modality Mammo X-Ray Modality

- T wo shading calibrations are required: - Select 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm Mammo Cassette.


- One with a 24 x 30 cm cassette - Check image plates.
- One with a 18 x 24 cm cassette - Erase cassettes.
- Using the 2 mm Al-Filter expose cassettes as follows:
- If multiple Mammo X-Ray modalities are available select preferred - Typical settings: 200 mAs, 28 kVp, Mo Source / Mo Filter
modality from preference list. See digitizer Service Manual - No compression paddle
chapter 3.6, Calibrations and Adjustments - Do not identify cassettes.
- Insert first exposed cassette in input slot.
- Repeat Shading Calibration with second Cassette.

Figure 34: Shading Calibration short Figure 35: Shading Calibration exposure
instructions on the local display information on the local display

(6) Confirm the information screens with <OK>.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 39


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(7) Answer the question, if multiple Mammography X-Ray Sources are available.
If no, continue with step (8).
If yes, choose the modality from the preference list in section 3.1.2.
(8) Insert the Mammography detector with format 24 x 30 cm into the input buffer
of the digitizer.
IMPORTANT:
Watch the information screen for status messages. If an error occurs
or a user action is necessary it will displayed here. In case of an error
refer to the appendix of this document.
NOTE:
The Mammography detector must be exposed at Mammography X-
Ray Source.

Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at

Display messages here, e.g. waiting for cassette input,


Scanning image plate, processing data, shading calibration
successful etc.

Figure 36: Information Screen during


shading calibration

(9) Follow the instructions on the display of the digitizer.


(10) When the digitizer is finished, confirm with <OK>.
Shading Calibration result will be displayed on the screen.

NOTE:
A second shading calibration must be done. Follow next steps.
Use cassettes with format 18 x 24 cm for second shading calibration.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 40


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(11) Select <Preventive Maintenance Calibration> in the service menu.


(12) Select <Mammo X-Ray Modality only>.

Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration

Genrad X-Ray Modality available

Mammo X-Ray Modality available only

Figure 37: Shading Calibration


Start Screen

(13) Confirm with <OK>.


NOTE:
The next screen that will be displayed is an information screen with
exposure instructions. For more information concerning exposure
conditions refer to the previous sections of this document.

Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at Service Menu: Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at
Mammo X-Ray Modality Mammo X-Ray Modality

- Two shading calibrations are required: - Select 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm Mammo Cassette.


- One with a 24 x 30 cm cassette - Check image plates.
- One with a 18 x 24 cm cassette - Erase cassettes.
- Using the 2 mm Al-Filter expose cassettes as follows:
- If multiple Mammo X-Ray modalities are available select preferred - Typical settings: 200 mAs, 28 kVp, Mo Source / Mo Filter
modality from preference list. See digitizer Service Manual - No compression paddle
chapter 3.6, Calibrations and Adjustments - Do not identify cassettes.
- Insert first exposed cassette in input slot.
- Repeat Shading Calibration with second Cassette.

Figure 38: Shading Calibration Figure 39: Shading Calibration


short instructions on the local display exposure information on the local display

(14) Confirm the information screens with <OK>.


(15) Answer the question, if multiple Mammography X-Ray Sources are available.
If no, continue with step (16).
If yes, choose the modality from the preference list in section 3.1.2.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 41


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(16) Insert the Mammography detector with format 18 x 24 cm into the input buffer
of the digitizer.
IMPORTANT:
Watch the information screen for status messages. If an error occurs
or a user action is necessary it will displayed here. In case of an
error refer to the appendix of this document.
NOTE:
The Mammography detector must be exposed at Mammography X-
Ray Source.

Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Shading Calibration at

Display messages here, e.g. waiting for cassette input,


Scanning image plate, processing data, shading calibration
successful etc.

Figure 40: Information Screen during shading calibration.

(17) Follow the instructions on the display of the digitizer.


(18) When the digitizer is finished, confirm with <OK>.
Shading Calibration result will be displayed on the screen.
(19) Confirm with <OK>.
(20) When the digitizer is finished, exit the service menu.
(21) Remove the filter from the modality.
(22) Remove remaining adhesive from the modality.

NOTE:
The digitizer records 6 shading calibration lines: Gain 1 to Gain 6,
one shading calibration line for each facet of the polygon mirror
The calibration file is stored in the memory of the Photo Multiplier Module
(PMM).
The calibration file is overwritten by the new one, if the shading calibration
was successful.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 42


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

3.1.6 Verifying the successful Shading Calibration

The verification of the shading calibration is divided in 3 steps:

# Task Section
1 Creating flat field image(s) 3.1.6.1
2 Checking the image quality 3.1.6.2
3 Only if image quality is not OK: Enclosure delivered with
Compare the flat field with the test patterns. limit pattern set

3.1.6.1 Creating Flat field Image(s)

(1) Expose a flat field:


For GenRad and Mixed Use:
Expose a flat field with the largest available PIP or NIP detector (if
available): Use the same exposure parameters like for the exposure of the
shading calibration detector. See section 3.1.4.3.
For Mammography Use:
Expose a flat field with 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm detectors.
Use the same exposure parameters like for the exposure of the shading
calibration detector. See section 3.1.4.3.
(2) At the NX workstation select examination type System diagnosis Flat field.
(3) Identify the detector.
(4) Insert exposed detector in the digitizer.
(5) Wait till the digitizer has finished scan process.
(6) Print the image(s) or send it to the archive (depending on what is available).
For hardcopy the window should be approximately: 1.2

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 43


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

3.1.6.2 Checking the Images at the Light box or Viewing Station

NOTE:
Checking the images and comparing to the limit patterns may only happen on light
boxes and viewing stations that comply with the specified installation and
configuration conditions for diagnostic reading. For details please refer to the
respective instructions of the viewing stations / light boxes.

IMPORTANT:
The settings of window and level may not be changed after import of the
limit pattern set.

NOTE:
The slow scan direction is always parallel to the short side of the image plate (except
35 x 35 cm detectors). Due to the hanging protocol the appearance of the saved flat
field might differ from the physical orientation of the detector as it has entered the
digitizer.

43 cm 30 cm 30 cm 24 cm
15 cm 18 cm
24 cm
Slow scan 35 cm
direction
5170enc01.cdr

Figure 41: Image Plate sizes and Slow scan directions

ACTION:
Check the image quality of the flat field for the following aberrations:
Stripes in fast scan or slow scan direction
Large area inhomogeneities
Unacceptable number of white dots

Evaluation:
(1) If the scanned flat field does not show one of the aberrations,
no further action is required.
If the scanned flat field shows one of the aberrations,
continue with step (2).

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 44


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(2) Compare the image with the limit pattern set. For detailed instructions see
enclosure document which is part of the limit pattern set.
The limit pattern set is in scope of the delivery of the digitizer or is available in
Mednet GSO Library. It is also available as spare part:
Limit Pattern Set for verification of shading calibration GenRad:
Spare part number* CM+9 5170 0860 0
Limit Pattern Set, for verification of Mixed Use and Mammo Only use:
Spare part number* CM+9 5170 0760 0
* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

Additional evaluation step for Mammography Only use:

Perform the acceptance test protocol (ATP) of the CR Mammography Solution.


Refer to Chapter 3.6 of the CR Mammography Solution Manual.
IMPORTANT:
The ATP has to be done by an Agfa trained CR Mammography Solution
specialist.

NOTE:
See table below for an overview of use cases of modalities, consumables and
verification methods.

General Radiology Mammography


Detectors

GenRad GenRad Mammo Mammo


PIP NIP PIP NIP
35 x 43 35 x 43 24 x 30 18 x 24 24 x 30 18 x 24

General Radiology Cu Cu
X-Ray Modality

- - - -
(GenRad only) 1 1
Mixed use Cu Cu Cu* Cu* Cu* Cu*
(GenRad and Mammo) 1 1 2 2 2 2
Mammography Al Al Al Al
- -
(Mammo only) 2 2 2 2

* = The GenRad shading calibration also covers the calibrations for Mammo PIP and Mammo NIP.
Cu = Use Cu-Filter and GenRad consumables.
Al = Use Al-Filter and Mammography Consumables.
1 = Verification with GenRad Limit Pattern Set for Banding and Calibration
2 = Verification with Mammography Limit Pattern Set for Banding and Calibration
- = Not applicable

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 45


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

3.2 Stall Calibration

NOTE:
When to perform which stall calibration is described in the replacement instructions of
each spare part.

When Perform the stall calibration after replacement of:


IP Handling Board
Cassette Handling Board
After replacements of following assemblies or parts of it
(belts, motors, gears etc.):
o Locking unit
o Cassette fixation (as part of Buffer unit)
o Vacuum valve
o Connector drive
o Snaphook drive
o Swivel drive
o Linear transport
o Cassette transport (in the buffer unit)
o IP Carrier Adapter Plate

Purpose Determine the optimum motor current for stall detection.


Compensate the differences (e.g. friction, stepper motor properties, motor controller)
of an assembly in series production.

NOTE:
The motor drives several times toward its stopper (detected via stall detection) always
with different motor currents. The optimum current value for the motor will be
automatically defined after evaluation of stopper detection quality.

REQUIRED TOOLS:
Largest available detector

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 minute per stall calibration

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 46


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

IMPORTANT:
The IP Carrier Adapter (SM Carrier Drive, M610) may not be calibrated during PMV
(Preventive Maintenance Visit).

Only calibrate IP Carrier Adapter Plate if:


Problems during idle run of the digitizer occur.
IP Handling Board was replaced.
IP Carrier Adapter Plate was replaced.

Required (1) Switch on the digitizer.


steps
(2) Start the service menu. For more information concerning the service software
and how to access the service menu refer to DX-G / DX-M Service
Documentation Chapter 3.7 Software menus and settings.
(3) Select <Preventive Maintenance Stall Calibration> in the
service menu.

Service Menu > Preventive Maintenance > Stall Calibration

ALL except M610 & M202 SM Locking (M203)

SM Cassette Fixation (M204) SM Vacuum Valve (M624)

SM Connector (M626) SM Snaphooks (M510)

SM Swivel Drive (M625) SM Linear Transport (M514)

SM Carrier Drive (M610) SM Cassette Transport (M202)

Calibrate SM Locking
Stall Calibration finished:
iRun Cal = X

Figure 42

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 47


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(4) Select the required stall calibration as instructed in replacement or


maintenance instructions.
Select "Calibrate all Motors" to calibrate all motors automatically, one after
another.
IMPORTANT:
The stall calibration for cassette fixation must always be
performed before stall calibration of cassette transport, if
both calibration are necessary.
Calibrate All Motors does not calibrate SM Carrier
Drive and SM Cassette Transport.

(5) Wait till the stall calibration is finished.


This takes approximately 1 minute per motor.

NOTE:
It is possible to use the stall calibration of a single motor for troubleshooting the
mechanics: When repeating the stall calibration three times for the same motor, all
three values have to be in the limit of +/- 3 digits (e.g. 57, 60, 63). If the 3 values are
not within the limit of +/- 3 digits, check the mechanics (e.g belt tension, proper
mounting of mechanical parts etc.).

Result The stall calibration is successfully performed.

4 Performing a Backup

After any adjustment or calibration it is recommended to perform a backup.


The backup procedure will be executed automatically by the digitizer.
To create a backup manually refer to DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.7 "Software Menus and Settings".

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 48


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

5 Appendix

5.1 Changes in Shading Calibration Procedure in case Full Leg/Full Spine


(FLFS) Cassette is used

NOTE:
This section describes the changes in the shading calibration procedure, if a FLFS
detector is used. See section 3.1.

IMPORTANT:
Use FLFS detectors for shading calibration, if no large GenRad detectors are
available! If a large GenRad detector is available use it for shading calibration.

(1) Put 2 detectors underneath the FLFS detector if you use a FLFS detector for
shading calibration.

NOTE:
This covers the area where the detector has no backscatter protection.
Only this area has to be covered, which is used by the digitizer to
determine the shading calibration curves.

FLFS cassette

Area used by
Area used by shading calibration
shading calibration

Put a cassette underneath this area.


This prevents, that the missing
backscatter protection falsifies the
shading calibration result.

Figure 43: Exposure 1 Figure 44: Exposure 2

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 49


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

(2) Observe important note when evaluating the flat field (see section 3.1.6.2).

IMPORTANT:
If you use a FLFS detector for flat field exposure, the image will be
slightly darker in the upper and lower image area where the
backscatter protection is removed (approximately 1 cm each).
These darker zones also have to be used for image quality
evaluation in slow scan and fast scan direction to verify a
successful shading calibration.

Flatfield with General Radiology Cassette Flatfield with FLFS Cassette

Effect exaggerated

Figure 45

NOTE:
If GenRad shading calibration has been done with FLFS detectors, the
Mammography shading calibration needs to be done subsequently.
This helps to avoid the appearance of zones with reduced bad scatter
protection in Mammography images.
The Mammography shading calibration creates a new shading calibration file.
It does not overwrite the shading calibration file of the same image plate type
created by the GenRad calibration.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 50


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

5.2 Troubleshooting of a not successful Shading Calibration

This section lists possible error messages.

5.2.1 Underexposed Message

Symptom Following message pops up in the shading calibration client:


Underexposed (too low pixel values for normalization).
Maximum detected scan value is xxxxx*, maximum allowed value is
yyyy*. Please increase the exposure dose and try again.
* This is only an example. In the real message the xxxxx and the yyyy are replaced by values.

Cause Underexposed: Scan Average Level PVI(log) < 2532

Solution (1) Increase the exposure dose with one step and redo the calibration.
(2) Check the exposure conditions, preferably with a dosimeter.
(3) Repeat the shading calibration.

NOTE:
The Genrad shading calibration procedure accepts an X-ray dose
between 8 and 50 G.

5.2.2 Overexposed Message

Symptom Following message pops up in the shading calibration client:


Overexposed. Please reduce the exposure dose and try again.

Cause Overexposed: Scan Average Level PVI(log) > 63310

Solution (1) Reduce the exposure dose by one step and redo the calibration.
(2) Check whether the Cu filter is mounted.
(3) Repeat the shading calibration.

NOTE:
For shading calibration on a mammography modality the exposure may never be lower
than 50 mAs and 0.5 seconds.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 51


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Adjustments and Calibrations

5.2.3 Dust detected Message

Symptom Following failure message pops up in the shading calibration client:


Dust detected at pixel position xxxx of yyyy.
Please clean light collector and try again.
* This is only an example. In the real message the xxxxx and the yyyy are replaced by values.

Cause
Shading calibration curve with a strong, steep slope

Solution (1) Check if the exposure was really a flat field.


(2) Check the image plate for scratches in slow-scan direction and for dust.
Expose another image plate which is dry and clean.
(3) Clean the light collector with the built-in brush.
(4) Repeat the shading calibration.

5.2.4 Non-continuous Calibration Message

Symptom Following failure message pops up in the shading calibration client:


The calibration line is non-continuous.
Please check collimation and optics.

Cause Shading calibration curve with too strong deviations between highest
and lowest level.
Shading calibration values at the edges are at the borderline.

Solution (1) Check if the exposure was really a flat field:


(2) Check the collimation, exchange the image plate (dry and clean) and redo the
calibration.
(3) Make sure that the image plate was exposed without collimation.
(4) Check the image plate for scratches in slow-scan direction.
(5) Repeat the shading calibration.

IMPORTANT:
Redo the calibration on another X-Ray source if:
None of the above named actions show success.
Multiple X-Ray sources are available.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 DX-G / DX-M Chapter 3.6 / 52


07-2010 Type 5170/100/200 as of SW NIM_2000 Agfa Company Confidential
Chapter 3.7
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Software Menus, Settings

Document No: DD+DIS001.10E

DX-M
Type 5170 / 200

DX-G
Type 5170 / 100
as of Software Version NIM_2000

Purpose of this Document

This document describes the software menus for operation and service available
via user interface for the DX-G (Type 5170 / 100) and DX-M (Type 5170 / 200)
digitizers as of software version NIM_2000.

Document History

Edition. Release Changes


Revision Date
2.0* 04-2010 Initial version for DX-M and DX-G
with Software Version higher than NIM_2000
* Based on DX-G Service Manual Edition 1

Referenced Documents

Document Title
DD+DIS001.10E DX-G / DX-M Service Manual,
Chapter 3.2 - Tools and auxiliary Means

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0
04-2010 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 29608151
eq_03-7_menus-setting_e_template_v07
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 2


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

LIST OF CONTENTS

1 DIGITIZER INTERFACES ........................................................................................................5


1.1 LED Status Indicator .................................................................................................................6

1.2 Touch Panel ..............................................................................................................................7

1.2.1 Erasure Button ..........................................................................................................................7

1.2.2 Configuration Button .................................................................................................................8

1.2.3 Information Button...................................................................................................................10

1.3 Service Mode Button...............................................................................................................10

2 SERVICE MENU ....................................................................................................................11


2.1 Access to the Service Menu ...................................................................................................11

2.1.1 Access to the Service Menu via Local Display .......................................................................11

2.1.2 Access the Service Menu via Web Client ...............................................................................12

2.2 Service Menu Buttons in the Local Display ............................................................................12

2.3 Structure of the Service Menu ................................................................................................13

2.4 Device Info ..............................................................................................................................15

2.4.1 Main Device Info .....................................................................................................................15

2.4.2 Network Info ............................................................................................................................16

2.4.3 Info Counter ............................................................................................................................18

2.4.4 E-Labels ..................................................................................................................................19

2.5 Reporting.................................................................................................................................20

2.5.1 Service Activity Log.................................................................................................................20

2.5.2 Error Statistics.........................................................................................................................21

2.5.3 HOT Report (Hand-over Test Report) ....................................................................................22

2.6 Modification .............................................................................................................................23

2.6.1 Software Installation................................................................................................................23

2.7 Analysis & Repair....................................................................................................................25

2.7.1 Explain Error Code..................................................................................................................25

2.7.2 Calibration Board Position ......................................................................................................26

2.7.3 Couple Position .......................................................................................................................27

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 3


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2.7.4 IP Carrier to Park Position ......................................................................................................28

2.7.5 Diagnose Cycle .......................................................................................................................29

2.7.6 Endurance Run Cycle .............................................................................................................31

2.7.7 Clear Relative Counters..........................................................................................................32

2.8 Preventive Maintenance .........................................................................................................33

2.8.1 Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................33

2.8.2 Stall Calibration .......................................................................................................................34

2.8.3 IP Carrier Maintenance Position .............................................................................................35

2.8.4 Maintenance Indicator.............................................................................................................36

2.9 Configuration...........................................................................................................................37

2.9.1 Site Specific Data....................................................................................................................37

2.9.2 Digitizer Settings .....................................................................................................................39

2.9.3 Exchanged Components.........................................................................................................43

2.9.4 Switch on/off HV on PMM .......................................................................................................44

2.9.5 Protection Mechanism ............................................................................................................45

2.9.6 Backup & Restore ...................................................................................................................46

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 4


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

1 Digitizer Interfaces

The digitizer offers following user interfaces:


Status indicator: Refer to section 1.1, LED Status Indicator.
Touch panel which enables access to all functions (including service menu):
Refer to section 1.2, Touch Panel.

Overview of interfaces:
LED Status Indicator c 2
Touch panel d 1

Ethernet connection
(located at the rear side) e
On/Off switch (main switch) f
3

Figure 1

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 5


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

1.1 LED Status Indicator

The LED status indicator informs by light signals about the status of the digitizer
as shown in table below.

Description of the status indicator lamp:

Status Indicator Digitizer Status Action


Activating the erasure Enter cassettes into the input buffer
Constant
cycle. for erasing.
Blue
Proceeding the erasure Remove cassettes from Output
Flashing
cycle. buffer.
Stand-by mode Enter cassettes into the input buffer
Constant
(READY) for scanning.
Green Busy with scanning and
Flashing transporting cassette Remove cassettes from output buffer.
and image plate
Check Digitizer touch panel and
workstation display for further
Service mode
information and detailed instructions.
Constant Or:
Or:
Fatal error
Contact an Agfa certified Service
Red Engineer.
Warm up / Self-test Check Digitizer touch panel and
Processing workstation display for further
Flashing information and detailed instructions.
Software down
Error

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 6


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

1.2 Touch Panel

If the self-test is completed successfully,


the digitizer enters the operator mode and
the status indicator is continuously lighting
up in green.

The Standby screen with following buttons is


shown:
Erasure Button
Configuration Button
Information Button Figure 2
Service Mode Button

1.2.1 Erasure Button

Erasing an image plate has to be done in


following cases:
If the image plate has not been used for
more than 48 hours.
In this case, the image plate may have
been exposed to scattered radiation.
If an image plate has been exposed to
an exceptionally high X-ray dose.
In this case, deep layers of the image
plate may still retain a latent image after
Figure 3
standard erasure.
Leave the image plate to rest at least one
day before re-erasing it.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 7


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

1.2.2 Configuration Button

Purpose of the configuration button is:


To re-route images.
To turn the volume of digitizer
signals and beeps on or off.
To change the brightness of
the touch panel on the digitizer.

Figure 4

After touching the configuration button an


T
overview of the currently processed images Chest123
Leg456
VAM111
MORL222
PREVIEWSTAT
appears (see Figure 5). Foot789

Figure 5

The configuration screen information mean:


Chest123 VAM111 T
1: Image User ID Leg456
Foot789
MORL222
PREVIEWSTAT

2: Workstation
3: Status
1 2 3

Figure 6

Following different statuses are possible:


T (Transmitting) means, that the digitizer is transmitting the image.
W (Warning) means, that the image transmission has failed and manual
re-transmission to a new workstation necessary.
Q (Queued) means, that the image is in the transmission queue and a
manual transmission to another workstation is possible.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 8


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

(1) Click the button to turn


the volume off.
Or
Click the button to turn
the volume on.

Figure 7

(2) Click the button to reduce the


brightness.
Or
Click the button to increase
the brightness.

(3) Click the button to confirm


your settings.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 9


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

1.2.3 Information Button

The information button displays following


information of the digitizer:
IP Address
Digitizer Name
Software version
Name of the primary Control PC

(1) Click the information button to display


the information screen. Figure 8

(2) Click the button to exit the digitizer


information screen.

Figure 9

1.3 Service Mode Button

The service mode button allows access to the


service menu for service activities.
For more information concerning service menu
refer to section 2.

Figure 10

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 10


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2 Service Menu

The service menu allows the field service engineer to access the service software
of the digitizer.
The service menu is locked by the standard Agfa service password. It is also possible
to lock the service menu via protection mechanism (customized password). For more
information concerning the protection mechanism refer to section 2.9.5.

2.1 Access to the Service Menu

2.1.1 Access to the Service Menu via Local Display

(1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the digitizer is booted-up, i.e. till the status indicator is green.
(3) Click on the service mode button in
the local display of the digitizer.

Figure 11

(4) Enter requested data.


Service menu will be displayed in the local display, see figure below.
NOTE:
Navigate through the service menu by touching on the several menu
buttons or options with a finger, see Figure 13.

Service Menu > Login Service Menu

Device Info

User: Reporting

Modification
Passwort:
Analysis & Repair

Preventive Maintenance

Configuration

Backup / Restore

Figure 12: Service Menu Login Figure 13: Service Menu Main Screen

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 11


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2.1.2 Access the Service Menu via Web Client

(1) Switch on the digitizer.


(2) Wait till the digitizer is booted-up, i.e. till the status indicator is green.
(3) Start the Service PC.
(4) Open a web browser or the windows explorer.
(5) Enter IP address of the digitizer (to get IP refer to section 1.2.3).
(6) Enter requested data.
Service menu will be displayed in the web browser.
NOTE:
Navigate through the service menu by clicking on the several menu
buttons or options.

2.2 Service Menu Buttons in the Local Display

The navigation and confirmation in the service menu is implemented via touch
buttons. The following table shows an overview of the different buttons and states.

Button Example image from Purpose


service menu
Menu-Button To show a selectable
Modification
(selectable) menu-entry. Touching
this menu-button opens
a submenu.
Menu-Button (not To show a selected
Modification
selectable) menu.
Action-Button To select an action via
(selectable) touch.
Action-Button To show a selected
(not selectable) action.
Pull-down menu 1
To select different
choices.
2

OK-Button To confirm an action.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 12


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

Button Example image from Purpose


service menu
Cancel-Button To cancel an action.

Down-Button To scroll down on a


page.
Up-Button To scroll up on a page.

Next-Button To switch to the next


page in the menu.
Edit-Button To edit or add text in the
service menu.
IP Address 192.192.192.192
Virtual Keyboard To enter serial numbers,
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
digitizer data or anything
Gateyway else into the service
AE-Title DXM192 menu.
Hostname dxm192 The keyboard appears,
if an editable field was
selected and input is
required.

2.3 Structure of the Service Menu

NOTE:
This service software structure is only applicable for DX-G (Type 5170 / 100) and
DX-M (Type 5170 / 200) with service software as of software version NIM_2000.
All menus are available via local display of the digitizer and also via web interface.
All screenshots in this section are based on the local display.
Web client access to the service software might differ from screenshots.
Refer to next page to see an overview of the service software structure.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 13


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

Menu See Section


Device Info
Main Device Info 2.4.1
Network Info 2.4.2
Info Counter 2.4.3
E-Label 2.4.4
Reporting
Service Activity Log 2.5.1
Error Statistics 2.5.2
HOT Report 2.5.3
Modification
Software Installation 2.6.1
Analysis & Repair
Explain Error Code 2.7.1
Cal. Board Position 2.7.2
Couple Position 2.7.3
IP Carrier to park position 2.7.4
Diagnose Cycle* 2.7.5
Endurance Run Cycle* 2.7.6
Clear Relative Counters 2.7.7
Preventive Maintenance
Shading Calibration 2.8.1
Stall Calibration 2.8.2
IP Carrier Maintenance Position 2.8.3
Maintenance Indicator 2.8.4
Configuration
Site specific Data 2.9.1
Digitizer Settings 2.9.2
Exchanged Components 2.9.3
Switch on/off HV on PMM 2.9.5
Protection Mechanism 2.9.5
Backup & Restore 2.9.6

* When accessing this menu via web client, a confirmation on the local
display is necessary.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 14


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2.4 Device Info

2.4.1 Main Device Info

Purpose Show the device specific data configured in production.

Usage (1) Select: <Device Info Main Device Info>


Device specific data will be displayed.
NOTE:
The Device specific Data are read-only and just for identification of
the device.

Service Menu > Device Info > Main Device Info

Type Number: 5170


Subtype Number: 100
Serial Number: 12345
Manufacturer Date: 28 Jan 2010

Software Version: NIM 2010


Number of IP Cycles: 23456

Figure 14

(2) Select <Cancel> to go back to the menu.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 15


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2.4.2 Network Info

Purpose Show the network settings of the digitizer and the hospital network with connected
devices.

Usage (1) Select: <Device Info Network Info>


Network Info will be displayed.

(2) Select <Ping Destination> to perform a ping test.

NOTE:
The ping test tries to send data to the selected destination in the network
to verify an established connection.

Service Menu > Device Info > Network Info

Digitizer Information:
Hostname: Dxm22
AE-Title: DXM22

Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Default Router: 192.168.2.1

Destinations IP Address Information:


Workstation 1: 192.168.2.21
Workstation 2: 192.168.2.22

Figure 15

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 16


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

(3) Select a destination to perform the ping test.


(4) Select <Ping> to perform the ping test.
Evaluation:
If the message Reply from appears, the test was successful.
If the message Request timed out appears, the test failed.
In that case, check:
o Network settings of the digitizer
o The configuration of the workstation in the digitizer
o The status of the workstation (ping destination)

Service Menu > Device Info > Network Info

Select destination to ping:

Workstation 1 192.168.2.20

Result:
Reply from 192.168.2.20: bytes=32 time=1 ms TTL=64
Reply from 192.168.2.20: bytes=32 time=1 ms TTL=64
Reply from 192.168.2.20: bytes=32 time=1 ms TTL=64

Figure 16

(5) Select <Cancel> to go back to the menu.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 17


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2.4.3 Info Counter

Purpose Check device-specific information like:


Hardware components
Software components
Modification history (installation, repair, maintenance)
History of occurred errors, warnings and retries
Used image plates, cassettes
Recognize failures and reduce the repair times in the field or in the repair center.

Usage (1) Select: <Device Info - Info Counter>

Service Menu > Device Info > Info Counter

Parameter Value (absolute) Value (relative)

1. Site and System Info

1.1 Device Info


Product Name: DX-M
Type-No: 5170

Serial-No: 1234
Manufacture Date: 2010-01-09
Installation Date: 2010-01-19

Figure 17

(2) Use the up and down scroll buttons on the right side to scroll through
the info counter data.

Service Menu > Device Info > Info Counter

Parameter Value (absolute) Value (relative)

Retry 10270 17 5

5.4 Incorrect User Handling

Figure 18

(3) Select <Cancel> to go back to the menu.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 18


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2.4.4 E-Labels

Purpose Analyze the 'E-labels' to get information about module specific data like module
serial number, last error codes or module specific parameters. This helps to avoid
adjustments and loading of hardware modification medium at replacements.
E-Labels allow automatic tracking of module exchanges (automatic info counter
entries). The returned, defective module has all required data in the E-Label
to make fault investigations.

Usage (1) Select: <Device Info - E-Labels>


(2) Select the desired E-Label node.
The information concerning the E-Label is shown automatically.
(3) Use the up and down scroll buttons on the right side to scroll
through the data.

Service Menu > Device Info > E-Labels

IP Handling

Name of the module


Hardware version of the module
Module order number (ABC code)
Module part number
Serial number of the module
Date of first use in device
Date of last use in device
Module operating hours

Figure 19

(4) Select <Cancel> to go back to the menu.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 19


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2.5 Reporting

2.5.1 Service Activity Log

Purpose Analyze the logfile of all actions carried out by the service staff.

Usage (1) Select: <Reporting - Service Activity Log>

(2) Use the up and down scroll buttons on the right side to scroll through the data.

Service Menu > Reporting > Service Activity Log

Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text

Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text
Timestamp Text

Figure 20: Example log-file

NOTE:
All ServiceActivity.log files are part of a backup.
When the logfile exceeds 1 MB, a new empty <ServiceActivity.log> file is
created. The previous one is automatically renamed to ServiceActivity1.log on the
backup medium.

(3) Select <Cancel> to go back to the menu.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 20


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2.5.2 Error Statistics

Purpose Check recorded error statistics. This is used for troubleshooting.

Usage (1) Select <Reporting - Error Statistics>.

(2) Use the up and down scroll buttons on the right side to scroll through the data.

NOTE:
For the explanation of the error codes use the module explain error
code. For more information refer to section 2.7.1.

Service Menu > Reporting > Error Statistics

Error Name Relative Count

8704 TEST_MODULE_FAILED 6
10248 CLEAN_UP_RETURN_IP_FAILED 4
10267 FIND_REFERENCE_SNAP_HOOKS_FAILED 2

Figure 21: Example screen of error statistics

(3) Select <Cancel> to go back to the menu.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 21


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2.5.3 HOT Report (Hand-over Test Report)

Purpose Check the last cassette cycle. The most important events that happened in the digitizer
during this cycle are reported here. When the HOT is performed successfully, the
technical installation (communication and image transmission) is basically working.

It is overwritten with each new scan cycle. Typically it stops with the last successful
action performed, hence it can be used for troubleshooting as well.

Usage (1) Select: <Reporting - HOT Report>


(2) Use the up and down scroll buttons on the right side to scroll through
the data.

Service Menu > Reporting > HOT Report

Date:
Time:

Address:
Serial Number:
Created by:

Journal of Hand-over Test:


Timestamp Digitizer Action
Timestamp Digitizer Action
Timestamp Digitizer Action
Timestamp Digitizer Action

Figure 22

(3) Select <Cancel> to go back to the menu.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 22


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2.6 Modification

2.6.1 Software Installation

Purpose Show installed software or install the digitizer software on the digitizer.

NOTE:
Detailed installation steps for a software update of the digitizer are described in
a document which is part of the software delivery (readme or enclosure document).

IMPORTANT:
For software installation a USB stick (checked to be virus-free) is required. One USB
Memory stick is scope of delivery of the digitizer. The USB port of the digitizer does not
accept all types of USB sticks.
The USB Memory Stick delivered with the digitizer is recommended. The USB Stick
can also be ordered via order number*: CM+ 9 5170 0860 1

Check (1) Select: <Modification Software Installation>


Software Installed software version is shown in the local display.
Version
To install new software follow the instructions on the display or see instructions
below.

Service Menu > Modification > Software Installation

Installed Software:
Board Software Version
PMI Board NIM_2007
IP Handling Board NIM_2007
Cassette Handling Board NIM_2007
Installing Software NIM_2106
Instructions for Software Upload: Please wait!
1. Switch off the Digitizer.
2. Insert USB Stick with prepared Software.
3. Switch Digitizer on to install Software.
4. Wait until the Digitizer shows the READY screen.
5. Switch Digitizer off and remove USB stick.

Figure 23 Figure 24

(2) Select <Cancel> to go back to the menu.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 23


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

Install new (1) Download the latest software from Mednet GSO Library, path:
Software Computed Radiography => CR Digitizers => DX-M => Software
(2) Copy the folder NIM_XXXX* and its contents to the USB Memory Stick.
If the file is zipped it must be unzipped before copying.
(3) Navigate to \NIM_XXXX* on the USB Memory Stick.
*XXXX = software version

(4) Double click on <Prepare_Installation.cmd>.


If the solid state hard disk of the digitizer should be formatted additionally,
double click on <Prepare_Formatting.cmd> instead.
(5) Release the USB Memory Stick from Service PC.
(6) Switch off digitizer.
(7) Open front cover.
(8) Plug the USB Memory Stick into the USB slot of the digitizer.
(9) Close digitizer.
(10) Switch on digitizer.
(11) Wait until digitizer has booted automatically with the new software.
IMPORTANT:
Do not remove the USB stick until the READY-screen is displayed
on the local display.
(12) Remove USB Memory Stick from digitizer.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 24


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS001.10E Software Menus, Settings

2.7 Analysis & Repair

2.7.1 Explain Error Code

Purpose Check the error codes which are reported by the error viewer.

Usage (1) Select: <Analysis & Repair - Explain error code>


(2) Touch the field Error Code.
Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > Explain Error Code

Error Code:

Name:

Display Name:

Short Description:

Description:

Figure 25

(3) Enter the error code by using the virtual keyboard on the local display.
(4) Confirm with: <Enter>

Service Menu > Analysis & Repair > Explain Error Code

Error Code 10267


Name:

Display Name:

Short Description:

Description:

Figure 26: Example

(5) Select <Cancel> to go back to the menu.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:


The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 0 DX-G/DX-M Chapter 3.7 / 25


04-2010 Type 5170/100/200 Agfa Company Confidential
Rep